2015 Jeep Grand Cherokee Owner`s Manual

2015 Jeep Grand Cherokee Owner`s Manual
2015 Grand Cherokee
OWNER’S MANUAL
Chrysler Group LLC
15WK741-126-AD
2015
Fourth Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Grand Cherokee
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated nondrinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes
in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2014 Chrysler Group LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
! INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 ! WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
! ROLLOVER WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 ! VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .8
! HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 ! VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .9
1
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC
vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials
that are traditional to our vehicles.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and
perform tasks that conventional passenger cars are not
intended. It handles and maneuvers differently from
many passenger cars both on-road and off-road, so take
time to become familiar with your vehicle.
Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s
Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls,
particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle
handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills
will improve with experience. When driving off-road or
working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect
the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics.
Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws
wherever you drive.
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
The two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a
for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road collision. Refer to “On-Road/Off-Road Driving Tips” in
driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a “Starting And Operating” for further information.
four-wheel drive vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
INTRODUCTION 5
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than
many passenger cars. It is capable of performing better in
a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an
unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because
of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of
control it may roll over while some other vehicles may
not.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other
your satisfaction.
unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle
control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result
in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal
injury. Drive carefully.
1
6 INTRODUCTION
two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to die than a person
wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
Rollover Warning Label
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the Consult the following table for a description of the
U.S. government notes that the universal use of existing symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or this Owner’s Manual:
more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by
INTRODUCTION 7
1
8 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against
operating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
vehicle. Save this label for a convenient record of your
vehicle identification number and optional equipment.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on a
plate located on the left front corner of the instrument
panel pad, visible from outside of the vehicle through the
windshield. This number also is stamped into the right
front body, behind the right front seat. Move the right
front seat forward to allow better viewing of the stamped
VIN. This number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your
VIN Location
INTRODUCTION 9
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
Right Front Body VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
1
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
! A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
▫ Tamper Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message . . . . . . . . . .16 ! ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .22
! SENTRY KEY® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 ! REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . .23
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . .25
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
! VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .19
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .26
▫ Rearming The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .26
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 ! OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . .50
! REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . .28
▫ Important Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
▫ Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
! DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . .67
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
! KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
! WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
! LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
▫ Power Liftgate — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
! ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . .108
! SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) with the push of a button, as long as the Remote Keyless
transmitter and a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN).
Entry (RKE) transmitter is in the passenger compartment.
The Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) has four operating
positions; three of which are labeled and will illuminate
This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and
feature. Refer to #Keyless Enter-N-Go™# in #Things To ON/RUN. The fourth position is START, during start
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle# for further informa- RUN will illuminate.
tion.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Feature
2
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may
have a low or dead battery. In this situation, a back up
method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put
the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the
Key Fob against the ENGINE START/STOP button and
push to operate the ignition switch.
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
Key Fob
The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in
the rear of the Key Fob.
2
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead.
The emergency key is also for locking the glove box. You
can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and
then pull the key out with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
Opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in ACC or
ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind
you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the chime,
the ignition or accessory on message will display in the
cluster.
NOTE: With the Uconnect® system, the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power
outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition is placed in the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature. The time for this
feature is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
The system uses a Key Fob with a factory-mated Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, a Keyless Ignition Node
(KIN) and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle
operation. Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine to crank
with an invalid Key Fob.
After placing the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the system. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check,
it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start
SENTRY KEY®
the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system prevents unauthor- engine being shut off after two seconds.
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the system.
or unlocked.
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the Key Fob from vehicle, place the ignition
in the OFF and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
2
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as Replacement Keys
possible by an authorized dealer.
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
CAUTION!
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
• Do not make modifications or alterations to the cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
immobilizer system. Modifications or alterations to
CAUTION!
the immobilization system may result in a loss of
security protection.
• Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
• The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not comlock all doors when leaving the vehicle unatpatible with some aftermarket remote starting systended.
tems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
starting problems and loss of security protection.
always remember to place the ignition in the OFF
position.
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
NOTE: Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank
Key Fob is one that has never been programmed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer System serviced, VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer.
This Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors,
liftgate, and ignition for unauthorized operation. When
Customer Key Programming
the alarm is activated, the interior switches for door
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
locks, and power liftgate are disabled. The Vehicle Secuperformed at an authorized dealer.
rity Alarm provides both audio and visual signals; the
General Information
horn will sound, the headlights will turn on, park lamps
The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules part 15 and/or turn signals will flash repeatedly for three minand with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is utes. If the disturbance is still present (driver’s door,
passenger door, other doors, ignition) after three minutes,
subject to the following conditions:
the headlights, park lamps and/or turn signals will flash
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
for an additional 15 minutes.
• This device must accept any interference that may be NOTE: The Panic and Security alarms are quite different.
received, including interference that may cause unde- Please take a moment to activate the Panic and the
sired operation.
Security modes to hear the differences in the horn. In case
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved one should go off in the future, you will need to know
by the party responsible for compliance could void the which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it.
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
2
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Rearming The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the
horn after three minutes, turn off all of the visual signals
after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will
rearm itself.
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicles ignition is cycled to the “OFF”
position (refer to #Starting Procedures# in #Starting
And Operating# for further information).
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF.
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo™, make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF,
and the key is physically removed from the ignition.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
• Push LOCK on the interior power door lock switch
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
• Push the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry
Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the
same exterior zone (refer to #Keyless Enter-N-Go™#
in #Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle# for
further information).
• Push the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
To Disarm The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
will not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone
enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any
door, the alarm will sound.
• Push the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless • When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (refer to
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
#Keyless Enter-N-Go™# in #Things To Know Before
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previStarting Your Vehicle# for further information).
ously described arming sequences has occurred, the
• Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
position.
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
NOTE:
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
Vehicle Security Alarm.
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
• The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
power liftgate entry. Pushing the LIFTGATE button occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
2
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Tamper Alert
NOTE:
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in • The front courtesy overhead console and door couryour absence, the horn will sound three times, and the
tesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the
exterior lights blink three times when you unlock the
“Dome ON” position (extreme top position).
doors. Check the vehicle for tampering.
• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
(extreme bottom position).
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
doors or open any door.
The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the open the power liftgate, remote start your vehicle (if
outside mirrors (if equipped).
equipped), or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up
to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held Key Fob
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds,
with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not need
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition is
to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
placed in the ON/RUN position from the OFF position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
disables the system from responding to all RKE transmit- Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
ter buttons for all RKE transmitters.
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate. The
turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock
signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Fob
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
2
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Flash Lamps With Lock
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
This feature allows the Remote Keyless Entry
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
niently from outside the vehicle while still
the current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
maintaining security. The system has a range of
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further inapproximately 300 ft (91 m).
formation.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
NOTE:
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds • The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
equipped through Uconnect®. To change the current • Obstructions between the vehicle and the RKE transmitter may reduce this range.
setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Using The Panic Alarm
Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights
will flash, and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the
signal.
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is activated,
the turn signals will flash, the horn will pulse on and off,
and the interior lights will turn on.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things To Know Before The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
you turn it off by either pushing the PANIC button a
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 MPH
Sound Horn With Lock
(24 km/h) or greater.
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be NOTE:
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, • The interior lights will turn off if you place the ignition
refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your
in the ACC or ON/RUN position while the Panic
Instrument Panel” for further information.
Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and
horn will remain on.
2
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the • Used batteries are harmful to the environment. You
can dispose of them either in the correct containers as
vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the
specified by law or by taking them to a Dealership,
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
which will deal with their disposal.
by the system.
Programming Additional Transmitters
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways
Transmitter Battery Replacement
with your thumb and then pull the key out with your
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
other hand.
battery.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade
NOTE:
screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves
of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
the seal during removal.
Batteries could contain dangerous materials. Please
dispose of them according to respect for environment
and local laws.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
Separating RKE Transmitter Case
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
including interference that may cause undesired op(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
eration.
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery by the party responsible for compliance could void the
clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
2
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal NOTE:
distance, check for these two conditions:
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of
the battery is a minimum of three years.
• Obstructions between the vehicle and the RKE transmitter may reduce this range.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB
How To Use Remote Start
radios.
All of the following conditions must be met before the
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
engine will remote start:
• Shift lever in PARK
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve- • Doors closed
niently from outside the vehicle while still • Hood closed
maintaining security. The system has a range of
• HAZARD switch off
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
• BRAKE switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
• RKE PANIC button not pushed
• Fuel meets minimum requirement
Remote Start Abort Message On Driver
Information Display (DID) — If Equipped
The following messages will display in the DID if the
• System not disabled from previous Remote Start event vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prematurely:
• Vehicle security alarm not active
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
• Remote Start Cancelled — Door Ajar
• Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Ajar
• Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Cancelled — System Fault
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset
The DID message stays active until the ignition is turned
to the ON/RUN position.
2
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Enter Remote Start Mode
• For security, power window and power sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
in the Remote Start mode.
Push and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec- • The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
onds. The parking lights will flash, vehicle
15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,
doors will lock, and the horn will chirp twice (if
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN
programmed). Once the vehicle has started, the engine
position before you can repeat the start sequence for a
will run for 15 minutes.
third cycle.
NOTE:
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
• If your power door locks were unlocked, Remote Start
Push and release the REMOTE START button one time or
will automatically lock the doors.
allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds. NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system
will disable the one time push of the REMOTE START
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Remote Start mode.
Start request.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
when the Remote Start is activated. These features will
stay on through the duration of Remote Start or until the
Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, push and release
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position.
the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock
the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm System The Comfort System can be activated and deactivated
(if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute through the Uconnect® system. For more information on
cycle, push and release the START/STOP button.
Comfort System operation, refer to “Uconnect® Settings”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel.”
NOTE: “Remote Start Active — Push Start Button” will
display in the Driver Information Display (DID) until DOOR LOCKS
you push the start button. Refer to “Driver Information
Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument The power door locks can be manually locked from
inside the vehicle by using the door lock knob. To lock
Panel” for further information.
each door, push the door lock knob on each door trim
Comfort Systems — If Equipped
panel downward. To unlock the front doors, pull the
When Remote Start is activated, Auto-Comfort will work inside door handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear
anytime the temperature conditions are correct. When doors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel
the feature is enabled, regardless of Remote Start or upward. If the lock knob is down when the door is
regular keyless start, the driver heated seat features will closed, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key is
automatically turn on in cold weather. In warm weather, not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
the driver vented seat feature will automatically turn on
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
2
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Manually locking the vehicle will not arm the
Vehicle Security Alarm.
Manual Door Lock Knob
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries or death.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
2
Power Door Locks
The power door lock switch is located on each front door
panel. Push the switch to lock or unlock the doors.
Power Door Lock Switch
If the door lock switch is pushed down when the door is
closed, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the Key
Fob is not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
If the door lock switch is pushed while the ignition is in
ACC or ON/RUN and the driver’s door is open, the
doors will not lock.
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If a rear door is locked, it cannot be opened from inside Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
the vehicle without first unlocking the door. The door Doors
may be unlocked manually by raising the lock knob.
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The Door Lock System
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
1. Open the rear door.
authorized dealer or through the Uconnect® Settings in
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and
your radio.
rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.
Automatic Unlock On Exit Feature — If Equipped
If Auto Unlock is enabled, this feature will unlock all the 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
doors when any door is opened if the vehicle is stopped
and in PARK. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
2
Child-Protection Door Lock Location
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged (locked).
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For emergency exit from the rear seats when the • If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
goes ajar within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock
Child-Protection Door Lock System is engaged, manually
and if equipped will arm the security alarm.
raise the door lock knob to the unlocked position, roll
down the window, and open the door using the outside
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
door handle.
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower reKEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™
sponse time.
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go™. This feature allows you With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to (1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the driver’s front
push the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.
NOTE:
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF. Refer to
“Uconnect® Settings”$ in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the
door is unlocked.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when
the door is unlocked.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the driver’s
front door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE
Transmitter In Vehicle
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature which will function if the ignition is OFF.
2
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel NOTE: If the vehicle is unlocked, then the liftgate will
switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors open with the electronic liftgate release and no RKE
have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and Transmitter is required.
outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitters. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE
transmitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no other
valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected outside the vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically
unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times
(on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive
Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle).
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate release. With a valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitter within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the liftgate, push the
Passive Entry/Lock Button Location
electronic liftgate release for a power open on vehicles
equipped with Power Liftgate. Push the electronic lift1 — Electronic Liftgate Release 2 — Lock Button Location
gate release and lift for Manual Liftgate vehicles.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft
(1.0 m) of the liftgate, push the passive entry lock button
located to the right of electronic liftgate release.
NOTE: The key must be within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the handle
being used to lock the vehicle.
2
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
in Uconnect® Settings, all doors will unlock when you
push the electronic liftgate release. If #Unlock Driver
Door 1st press# is programmed in Uconnect®, the liftgate
will unlock when you push the electronic liftgate release.
For further information, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel.”
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handle, push the door handle LOCK button to lock all
four doors and liftgate.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the door NOTE:
handle button. This could unlock the door(s).
• After pushing the door handle button, you must wait
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors,
using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to
allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling
the door handle without the vehicle reacting and
unlocking.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.
• Closeness to mobile devices can have an effect on the
passive entry system.
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the
vehicle’s interior door panel.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
WINDOWS
Power Windows
2
The power window controls are located on the driver’s
door trim panel. There is a single switch on the front
passenger door and rear doors which operate the front
passenger and rear passenger door windows. The window controls will operate only when the ignition switch
is in the ON/RUN or ACC position.
Power Window Switches
The power window switches remain active for up to ten
minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF.
Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature.
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not
leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power
window switches. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
down automatically. To cancel the “Auto-Down” movement, operate the switch in either the up or down
direction and release the switch.
To open the window part way, push to the first detent
and release it when you want the window to stop.
Auto-Down
Both the driver and front passenger window switches
have an “Auto-Down” feature. Push the window switch
past the first detent, release, and the window will go
Auto-Down Window Switches
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
Auto Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection —
Driver And Front Passenger Door Only
Lift the window switch fully upward to the second
detent, release, and the window will go up automatically.
2
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
“Auto Up” operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent and release when you want the window to
stop.
Auto-Up Window Switches
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If the window runs into any obstacle during
“Auto Up,” it will reverse direction and then go back
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window switch
again to close the window. Any impact due to rough road
conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during “Auto-Up.” If this happens, pull the
switch lightly to the first detent and hold it to close the
window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
Resetting The Auto Up Feature
Should the “Auto Up” feature stop working, the window
probably needs to be reset. To reset “Auto Up”:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue
to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
Window Lockout Button
Wind Buffeting
The Window Lockout button on the driver’s door allows
you to disable the window controls on the rear doors. To
disable the window controls on the rear doors, push the
Window Lockout button. To enable the window controls,
push the Window Lockout button again.
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.
LIFTGATE
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
Window Lockout Button
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate release. With a valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitter within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the liftgate, push the
electronic liftgate release to open with one fluid motion.
2
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed in
Uconnect® Settings, all doors will unlock when you push
the electronic liftgate release. If #Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press# is programmed in Uconnect® Settings, the liftgate
will unlock when you push the electronic liftgate release.
For further information, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel.”
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft
(1.0 m) of the liftgate, push the passive entry lock button
located to the right of electronic liftgate release.
NOTE: The liftgate unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate release.
Passive Entry/Lock Button Location
1 — Electronic Liftgate Release
2 — Lock Button Location
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
The power liftgate may be opened by pushing
the electronic liftgate release (refer to “Keyless
Enter-N-Go™” located in “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle”) or by pushing
the LIFTGATE button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter. Push the LIFTGATE button on the
RKE transmitter twice within five seconds to open the
power liftgate. Once the liftgate is open, pushing the
button twice within five seconds a second time will close
the liftgate.
The power liftgate may also be opened or closed by
pushing the LIFTGATE button located on the front
overhead console, or closed by pushing the LIFTGATE
button located on left rear trim panel, near the liftgate
opening. Pushing the LIFTGATE button located on left
rear trim panel once will close the liftgate only, this
button cannot be used to open the liftgate.
When the LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter is
pushed two times, the turn signals will flash twice to
signal that the liftgate is opening or closing (if Flash
Lamps with Lock is enabled in the Uconnect® settings),
and the liftgate chime will be audible. For further information, refer to #Uconnect® Settings# in #Understanding
Your Instrument Panel.#
2
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
NOTE:
• In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate, an • The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the
emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open
vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph
the liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can be
(0 km/h).
accessed through a snap-in cover located on the lift• The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures
gate trim panel.
below −22°F (−30°C) or temperatures above 150°F
• If liftgate is left open for an extended period of time,
(65°C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice
the liftgate may need to be closed manually to reset
from the liftgate before pushing any of the power
power liftgate functionality.
liftgate switches.
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
before driving away.
• If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is
closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically
reverse to the closed or open position, provided it
meets sufficient resistance.
• There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the
liftgate. Light pressure anywhere along these strips
will cause the liftgate to return to the open position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
• The power liftgate must be in the full open position for • If your liftgate is power closing and you put the
rear liftgate close button on the left rear trim, near the
vehicle in gear, the liftgate will continue to power
liftgate opening, to operate. If the liftgate is not fully
close. However, vehicle movement may result in a
open, push the Liftgate button on the Key Fob twice to
detection of an obstruction.
fully open the liftgate, and then push it twice to close.
• If the electronic liftgate release is pushed while the
power liftgate is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the
full open position.
• If the electronic liftgate release is pushed while the
power liftgate is opening, the liftgate motor will disengage to allow manual operation.
• If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions
within the same cycle, the system will automatically
stop and the liftgate must be opened or closed manually.
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
2
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
• Seat Belt Systems
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,
• Supplemental Active Head Restraints
move the seat as far back as possible and use the
proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”)
• Child Restraints
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle
Important Safety Precautions
seat belt properly (Refer to #Child Restraints#) should
Please pay close attention to the information in this
be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older chilproperly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
dren who do not use child restraints or beltpossible.
positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled
up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
Air Bags room to inflate.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your Seat Belt Systems
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
between you and the door and you could be injured. on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and could cause a collision that includes you. This can
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be happen far away from home or on your own street.
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
under #If You Need Consumer Assistance.#
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
2
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
are buckled. The driver should instruct all other occube belted at all times.
pants to buckle their seat belts. If an outboard front seat
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5
(BeltAlert)
MPH (8 km/h), BeltAlert will provide both audio and
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver visual notification.
and outboard front passenger (if equipped with outThe outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
board front passenger BeltAlert) to buckle their seat
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
belts. The feature is active whenever the ignition is in
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy
the START or ON/RUN position. If the driver or
object is on the outboard front passenger seat or when the
outboard front seat passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt
seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
outboard front seat belts are buckled.
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
The BeltAlert warning sequence begins after the vehicle and cargo is properly stowed.
speed is over 5 MPH (8 km/h) by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactiOnce the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire
vating BeltAlert.
duration or until the respective seat belts are buckled.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the
driver’s or outboard front passenger’s (if equipped with
BeltAlert) seat belt remains unbuckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
(Continued)
2
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If
you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take
it to your authorized dealer immediately and have
it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
(Continued)
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of
the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect
the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be
replaced after a collision.
(Continued)
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front 3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces 6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down
the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180° to create a fold
that begins immediately above the latch plate.
Positioning The Lap Belt
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
the latch plate.
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
2
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the
shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to
position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and
move it up or down to the position that serves you best.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position,
and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the
shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down
to make sure that it is locked in position.
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing or squeezing the release button. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is
locked into position.
Seat Belt Extender
Adjustable Anchorage
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used
only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it must be removed.
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat
belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender
if, when worn, the distance between the front edge
of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the seat belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the seat belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat
belt in the event of a collision. These devices may
improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
2
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) — If Equipped
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be The seat belts in the passenger seating positions may be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking RetracThe pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re- tors (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten- system. For additional information, refer to “Installing
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the
“Child Restraints” section of this manual. The table
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
below defines the type of feature for each seating posiEnergy Management Feature
tion.
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions that
may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of
a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly
that is designed to release webbing in a controlled
manner.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking
sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out
only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s midsection. Slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a #click.”
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the
seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap
around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic
Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a
seating position that has a seat belt with this feature.
Children 12 years old and under should always be
properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
2
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is
only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraints that have a harness for restraining
the child.
How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether the severity, or type of rear impact will require
the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear
impact requires deployment, both the driver and front
passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
These head restraints are passive, deployable compo- This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
nents, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
identified by any markings, only through visual inspec- certain types of rear impacts.
tion of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may
in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
not deploy in the event of a front or side impact.
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
However, if during a front impact, a secondary rear
impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the severity and type of the impact.
2
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in order
to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
collision.
NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and
positioning the head restraint, refer to “Adjusting Active
Head Restraints” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle.”
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Head Restraint Front Half (Soft Foam and Trim)
Seatback
Head Restraint Back Half (Decorative Plastic Rear Cover)
Head Restraint Guide Tubes
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in a collision,
you must reset the head restraint on the driver’s and
front passenger’s seat before driving. You can recognize
when the Active Head Restraint has been triggered by the
fact that they have moved forward (as shown in step
three of the resetting procedure).
2
1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat.
Hand Positioning Points On AHR
2. Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at
a comfortable position.
3. Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the
vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism.
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Review Table Below
A — Downward Movement
B — Rearward Movement
C — Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism
4. The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock
into the back decorative plastic half.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Air Bag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
AHR In Reset Position
NOTE:
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Advanced Front Air Bags
• If you have difficulties or problems resetting the Active • Supplemental Side Air Bags
Head Restraints, see an authorized dealer.
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• For safety reasons, have the Active Head Restraints
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized dealer.
2
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Seat Belt Pretenioners
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Seat Track Position Sensors
Advanced Front Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on
the air bag covers.
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Knee Air Bag
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage Advanced Front Air Bags.
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
2
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel,
because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bags to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air
bags.
(Continued)
Advanced Front Air Bag Operation
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk
of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal
collisions, including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced
Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occupants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli- Air Bags.
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
WARNING!
away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right
side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
2
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by
working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and
Advanced Front Air Bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):
Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
SABs are marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
air bag label sewn into the outboard side of the seats. during certain side impact and certain rollover events, in
addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the
seat belts and body structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
The inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into the
space between the occupant and the door. The SAB
moves at a very high speed and with such a high force
that it could injure you if you are not seated properly, or
if items are positioned in the area where the SAB inflates.
Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a
deploying air bag.
2
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
Label Location
(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim SABICs may help reduce the risk of head injury to front
covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or and rear seat outboard occupants. SABICs may reduce
“AIRBAG.”
the risk of injuries in certain side impact and vehicle
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
rollover events, in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.
WARNING!
The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs
inflate with enough force to injure you if you are not
belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in
the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs). Do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows where the SABIC and its deployment path
are located should remain free from any obstructions.
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for
the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any
accessory items in your vehicle which could alter
the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side
windows in certain rollover or side impact events.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
The SABICs and SABs (“Side Air Bags”) are designed to
activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover
events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (“ORC”) determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in
a particular side impact or rollover event is appropriate,
based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air
Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags,
occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit
upright with their backs against the seats. Children must
be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat
that is appropriate for the size of the child.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are
up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously
injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an
infant or child restraint.
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are
necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also
WARNING!
(Continued)
2
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air
Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have Side Air Bags.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced
Front Air Bags deploy.
Rollover Events
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover
events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is approSide Impacts
priate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
determining the appropriate response to impact events. Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events.
the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require
The rollover sensing-system determines if a rollover
Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the
event may be in progress and whether deployment is
Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right side appropriate. A slower-developing event may deploy the
seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle. A
impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
faster-developing event may deploy the seat belt pretensioners as well as the SABs and SABICs on both sides of
the vehicle. The rollover sensing-system may also deploy
the seat belt pretensioners, with or without the SABs and
SABICs, on both sides of the vehicle if the vehicle
experiences a near rollover event.
If A Deployment Occurs
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision, which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a
carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and
normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed
significantly within a few days, or if you have any
blistering, see your doctor immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
2
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de- Enhanced Accident Response System
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air In the event of an impact, if the communication network
bags will not be in place to protect you.
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine
WARNING!
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response SysDeployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot tem perform the following functions:
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller
System serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the ignition is placed in the “OFF” position.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition is placed in
the “OFF” position.
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
• Unlock the doors automatically.
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
OFF.
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition is first placed in the
Air Bag Warning Light
ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malThe air bags must be ready to inflate for your function in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag
protection in a collision. The Occupant Re- Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
straint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated again after initial startup.
with air bag system electrical components.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfuncthe air bag system whenever the ignition is in the START tion is detected that could affect the air bag system. The
or ON/RUN position. If the ignition is in the OFF diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
position or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance
on and the air bags will not inflate.
System Reset Procedure
2
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
WARNING!
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN position.
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first placed in
the on position, and stays on after you start the
vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
2
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
These data can help provide a better understanding of
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will the EDR under normal driving conditions and no perassist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per- sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to are recorded. However, other parties, such as law envehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
is designed to record such data as:
crash investigation.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating; To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
were buckled/fastened;
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip• How far (if at all) the driver was pushing the accelera- ment, can read the information if they have access to the
tor and/or brake pedal; and,
vehicle or the EDR.
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children.
WARNING! (Continued)
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
Every state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in proper
restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosThere are different sizes and types of restraints for
ecuted for ignoring it.
children from newborn size to the child almost large
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly enough for an adult seat belt. Always check the child seat
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct seat
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in for your child. Carefully read and follow all the instructhe rear seats rather than in the front.
tions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual
and on all the labels attached to the child restraint.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
(Continued)
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
2
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/safedriverschildsafety-index-53.htm
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org
or call 1–866–SEATCHECK (732–8243). Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for
additional information:
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infants and Toddlers
Small Children
Child Size, Height, Weight Or
Age
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not
reached the height or weight limits
of their child restraint
Children who are at least two
years old or who have out-grown
the height or weight limit of their
rear-facing child restraint
Recommended Type Of Child
Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear seat of the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with
a five-point Harness, facing forward
in the rear seat of the vehicle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
Larger Children
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Child Size, Height, Weight Or
Age
Children who have out-grown
their forward-facing child restraint,
but are too small to properly fit
the vehicle’s seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger,
who have out-grown the height or
weight limit of their booster seat
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they
reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing
child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children from birth until they
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Recommended Type Of Child
Restraint
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and
the vehicle seat belt, seated in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant
carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
child seat.
2
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
Older Children And Child Restraints
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward- in the vehicle by the seat belt.
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
(Continued)
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the seat belt
out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or
neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or
use a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
Seat Belt Only
LATCH –
Seat Belt + Top
Lower Anchors
Lower Anchors
Tether Anchor
Only
+ Top Tether
Anchor
X
X
X
X
X
X
2
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children (LATCH)
Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
2
•
•
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per
seating position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child
restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Can the LATCH anchorages and
the seat belt be used together to
attach a rear-facing or forwardfacing child restraint?
Can a child seat be installed in the
center position using the inner
LATCH lower anchorages?
No
No
Use the LATCH anchorage system
until the combined weight of the
child and the child restraint is
65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined
weight is more than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you
use the LATCH anchorage system
to attach a rear-facing or forwardfacing child restraint.
Use the seat belt and tether anchor
to install a child seat in the center
seating position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower
LATCH anchorage?
No
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
Can the head restraints be removed?
Yes
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage
with two or more child restraints.
If the center position does not have
dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a
child seat in the center position
next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard
position.
The child seat may touch the back
of the front passenger seat if the
child restraint manufacturer also
allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
The head restraints may be removed in the center seating position only.
2
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Locating LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the
gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
LATCH Anchorages
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
Locating Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of the
seat. To access them, pull the carpeted floor
panel away from the seat back, this will expose
the top tether strap anchorages.
2
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top
Tether Strap Anchorage
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
WARNING!
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top
Tether Strap Anchorage
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
• Do not install a child restraint in the center position using the LATCH system. This position is not
approved for installing child seats using the
LATCH attachments. You must use the seat belt
and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center
seating position.
• Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to “Installing
The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System”
for typical installation instructions.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
Center Arm Rest Tether
For rear-facing child restraints secured in the center seat
position with the vehicle seat belts, the rear center seat
position has an armrest tether that secures the arm rest in
the upward position.
2
1. To access the center seat arm rest tether, first lower the
arm rest. The tether is located behind the armrest and
hooked onto the plastic seat backing.
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether
2. Pull down on the tether to unhook it from the plastic
seat backing.
3. Raise the armrest and attach the tether hook to the
strap located on the front of the arm rest.
98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See the section
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt”
to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manumay need to recline the seat and/or raise the head
facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward
to allow more room for the child seat.
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether Attached
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt:
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat- When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
ing position.
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the used by other occupants or being used to secure child
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc- with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
tions to attach a tether anchor.
buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
in the straps according to the child restraint manufac- behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
turer’s instructions.
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) them.
in any direction.
2
100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to
be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking
Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints” for additional information on ALR.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
2
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor
with the seat belt to attach a forward
facing child restraint?
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passenger seat?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Can the head restraints be removed?
Yes
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the belt
path of the child restraint?
No
Yes
Always use the tether anchor when
using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to
the recommended weight limit of
the child restraint.
Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is
allowed, if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact.
The head restraints may be removed in the center seating position only.
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
seating position with an ALR retractor.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the seat belt until you have pulled all the seat belt
webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing
Place the child seat in the center of the seating
to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means the
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webrear-most position to make room for the child seat.
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
more room for the child seat.
portion around the child restraint while you push the
Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle
to pass it through the seat belt path of the child restraint.
seat.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the
“click.”
tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using
Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a
against the child seat.
tether anchor.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
1.
2.
3.
4.
2
104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the seat belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
seat belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether
Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to any
location in front of the car seat, including the seat frame
or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of a
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for that seating position, located behind the top of
the vehicle seat. See the section “Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System” for the
location of approved tether anchorages in your vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 105
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
tether anchorage for that seating position, move the
child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one
is available.
2
2. To access the top tether strap anchorages behind the
rear seat, pull the carpeted floor panel away from the
seat back, this will expose the top tether strap anchorages.
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top
Tether Strap Anchorage
106 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
4. For the center seating position, route the tether strap
over the seatback and headrest then attach the hook to
the tether anchor located on the back of the seat.
5. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
Top Tether Strap Anchorage (Located on Seatback)
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 107
WARNING!
Top Tether Strap Mounting
6. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
• The top tether anchorages are not visible until the
gap panel is folded down. Do not use the visible
cargo tie down hooks, located on the floor behind
the seats, to attach a child restraint tether anchor.
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
2
108 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An
unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured,
or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes
should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions
under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle.”
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
not interpreted as a problem.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 109
SAFETY TIPS
WARNING! (Continued)
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
(Continued)
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
(Continued)
2
110 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.
system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com- belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 111
Air Bag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is
not lit during starting, see your authorized
dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while
driving, have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
(Continued)
2
112 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 113
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Door Latches
Tires
Fluid Leaks
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
2
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
! MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .133
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . .123
▫ Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory
Seat Only) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .123
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . .131
▫ Power Folding Outside Mirrors — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
▫ Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
▫ Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
! BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
▫ Rear Cross Path (RCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
▫ Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
3
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
! SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
! DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED . . . .160
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
▫ Programming The Memory Feature . . . . . . . . .161
▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .146
▫ Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Transmitter To Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
▫ Manual Front Seats Forward/Rearward
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
▫ Manual Front Passenger Seatback Adjustment —
Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
! TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . .
▫ Front Passenger Seat Fold-Flat Feature — If
! LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . .
▫ Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . .152
▫ Headlights On Automatically With Wipers
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
▫ Automatic High Beam — If Equipped . . .
▫ 60/40 Split Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . .
▫ Reclining Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
. . .165
. . .166
. . .166
. . .168
. . .168
. . .168
. . .169
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
▫ Automatic Headlight Leveling — HID Headlights
Only. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
▫ Adaptive Bi-Xenon High Intensity Discharge
Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
▫ Headlight Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
▫ Parking Lights And Panel Lights. . . . . . . . . . .171
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
▫ Battery Saver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped . . .173
▫ Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
▫ Ambient Light — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .175
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
▫ High/Low Beam Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
! WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .176
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
▫ Windshield Washer Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . .179
▫ Mist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . .181
! TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .182
! POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
3
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
! HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED . .185
▫ To Activate/Deactivate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
! ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
! ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . .193
▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). . . .194
▫ To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
▫ To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
▫ To Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . . .200
▫ Overtake Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
▫ ACC Operation At Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . . .205
▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . .206
▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC . . . . . . .209
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
! FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH
MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
▫ Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
▫ Turning FCW ON Or OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
▫ Changing FCW And Active Braking Status. . . .220
▫ FCW Limited Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
▫ Service FCW Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
! PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
▫ ParkSense® Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
▫ ParkSense® Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
▫ ParkSense® Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® . . . . . . . .227
▫ Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense® System . . . . . . . . . .228
▫ ParkSense® System Usage Precautions. . . . . . .228
! PARKSENSE® FRONT AND REAR PARK
ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
▫ ParkSense® Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
▫ ParkSense® Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
▫ ParkSense® Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® . . . . . . . .236
▫ Service The ParkSense® Park Assist System . . .237
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense® System . . . . . . . . . .238
3
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ ParkSense® System Usage Precautions. . . . . . .238
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
! PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
! OVERHEAD CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped . . .244
▫ Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
▫ Sunglasses Bin Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
! GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .246
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . .247
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .249
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .251
▫ Using HomeLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
! POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .254
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .255
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .256
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
▫ Sunshade Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
! COMMANDVIEW® SUNROOF WITH POWER
SHADE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .259
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .260
▫ Opening Power Shade — Express . . . . . . . . . .260
▫ Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode . . . . .260
▫ Closing Power Shade — Express . . . . . . . . . . .261
▫ Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode . . . . . .261
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
! ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .262
! POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .267
! CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
! STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
▫ Door Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
▫ Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
! CARGO AREA FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
▫ Rechargeable Flashlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
▫ Cargo Storage Bins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
3
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Retractable Cargo Area Cover —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
▫ Rear Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
! REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
! ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED . . . . .281
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
Automatic
Dimming
Mirror — If Equipped
should be adjusted while the small control under the
mirror is set in the day position (toward the windshield). A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
3
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you.
NOTE: The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled when the vehicle is in reverse gear to improve rear
view viewing.
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature can be turned
On or Off through the touchscreen.
• Push the Mirror Dimmer button once to turn the
feature On.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
• Push the Mirror Dimmer button a second time to turn If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and
a 9-1-1 button.
the feature Off.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
NOTE: The ASSIST and 9–1–1 features operate through • Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
the Uconnect® Access service. These buttons will only
vehicle issues.
operate as long as your Uconnect® Access service is 9-1-1 Call
active. Refer to your “Uconnect® System supplement
1. Push the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
manual” for further information.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you
to any one of the following support centers:
NOTE: In case the 9-1-1 Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the 9-1-1 Call
system initiates a call to a 9-1-1 operator. To cancel the
9-1-1 Call connection, push the 9-1-1 Call button on the
Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation button on the
Phone Screen. Termination of the 9-1-1 Call will turn the
green LED light on the Rearview Mirror off.
• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a
tow, just push the Assist button and you’ll be connected to someone who can help. Roadside Assistance
will know what vehicle you’re driving and its location.
2. The LED light located between the Assist and 9-1-1
Additional fees may apply for roadside Assistance.
buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a
• Uconnect® Access Customer Care – In-vehicle support
connection to a 9-1-1 operator has been made.
for Uconnect® Access and Uconnect® Access Via
Mobile features.
3
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a 9-1-1
operator is made, the 9-1-1 Call system may transmit
the following important vehicle information to a 9-1-1
operator:
NOTE: Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s
9-1-1 Call system and the 9-1-1 operator, the 9-1-1 operator may be able to open a voice connection with the
vehicle to determine if additional help is needed. Once
the 9-1-1 operator opens a voice connection with the
• Indication that the occupant placed a 9-1-1 Call.
vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system, the operator should be able to
• The vehicle brand.
speak with you or other vehicle occupants and hear
sounds occurring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call
• The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
system will attempt to remain connected with the 9-1-1
4. You should be able to speak with the 9-1-1 operator operator until the 9-1-1 operator terminates the connecthrough the vehicle audio system to determine if tion.
additional help is needed.
5. The 9-1-1 operator may attempt to contact appropriate
emergency responders and provide them with important vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g.,
fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions
or location), do not wait for voice contact from a
9-1-1 operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle
immediately and move to a safe location.
• The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket
electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a
signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that can cause the 9-1-1 Call system to fail,
never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way
mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas
on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING
DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE
UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND SERVICES,
AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.
(Continued)
(Continued)
3
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Modifications to any part of the 9-1-1 Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you
need it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to help protect you.
9-1-1 Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9-1-1
Call system capabilities.
9-1-1 or other emergency line operators in Canada and
Mexico may not answer or respond to 9-1-1 system calls.
If the 9-1-1 Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is
detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
• The Rearview Mirror light located between the Assist
and 9-1-1 buttons will continuously be illuminated
red.
• The Phone Screen will display the following message
“Vehicle phone requires service. Please contact your
dealer.”
• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle phone
requires service. Please contact your dealer.”
WARNING!
• Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
will not have 9-1-1 Call services. If the Rearview
Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the 9-1-1 Call system immediately.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
WARNING! (Continued)
• The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on
the Air Bag Warning Light on the instrument panel
if a malfunction in any part of the system is
detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, the air bag system may not be working
properly and the 9-1-1 system may not be able to
send a signal to a 9-1-1 operator. If the Air Bag
Warning Light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the ORC system immediately.
• The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
• The 9-1-1 Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash.
• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes disconnected during a vehicle crash.
• Wireless and/or Global Positioning Satellite signals
are unavailable or obstructed.
• Equipment malfunction at the 9-1-1 operator facility.
• Operator error by the 9-1-1 operator.
Even if the 9-1-1 Call system is fully functional, factors
• Wireless network congestion.
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the
9-1-1 Call system operation. These include, but are not • Weather.
limited to, the following factors:
• Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
• Delayed accessories mode is active.
• The ignition is in the OFF position.
3
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
wireless and GPS antennas. You could prevent wireless
and GPS signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle
from placing an emergency call. Wireless and GPS signal
reception is required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function
properly.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrors
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Some vehicles will not have a convex passenger side
mirror.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
If the mirror is manually folded after electrically cycled,
a potential extra button push is required to get the
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
mirrors back to the home position. If the mirror does not
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
electrically fold check for ice or dirt build up at the pivot
three detent positions:
area which can cause excessive drag.
• Full forward position
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
• Full rearward position
• Normal position
Power Folding Outside Mirrors — If Equipped
If equipped with power folding mirrors, they can be
electrically folded rearward and unfolded into the drive
position.
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located
between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right).
Press the switch once and the mirrors will fold in, press
the switch a second time and the mirrors will return to
the normal driving position.
Power Folding Mirror Switch
3
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Mirrors
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s side
door trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
mirror, push the mirror select button for the mirror that
you want to adjust. Using the mirror control switch, push
on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want
the mirror to move.
Power Mirror Switch
1 — Mirror Direction Control
2 — Mirror Selection
Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by
the optional Memory Seat Feature. Refer to “Driver
Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory
The Drivers side mirror will automatically adjust for Seat Only) — If Equipped
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror
by the inside automatic dimming mirror. The mirrors will positioning which will aid the drivers view of the ground
automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside rearward of the front doors. Outside mirrors will move
slightly downward from the present position when the
mirror adjusts.
vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. Outside mirrors will
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
then return to the original position when the vehicle is
shifted out of REVERSE position. Each stored memory
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This seat setting will have an associated Tilt Mirrors in Refeature can be activated whenever you turn on the verse position.
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear
Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not turned
on when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Reverse feature can be turned on and off using the
Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings/
Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
3
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors
Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature — If Equipped
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for addithe visors.
tional flexibility in positioning the sun visor to block out
Lift the cover to reveal the mirror. The light will turn on the sun.
automatically.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
3. Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to
extend it.
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
EQUIPPED
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radarbased sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone
length starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends
approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the
vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection zones on
both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert
the driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
Rear Detection Zones
• The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones.
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
to let the driver know that the system is operational. The
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle
BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or
forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode
other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
when the vehicle is in PARK.
3
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire
time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
contamination so that the BSM system can function
properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where
the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
Sensor Location
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.
Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
3
Warning Light Location
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
alert during these types of zone entries.
Side Monitoring
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Entering From The Rear
Overtaking Traffic
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed
less than 10 mph (16 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking/Approaching
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
3
Overtaking/Passing
Stationary Objects
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage, traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert adjacent lanes.
on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicles
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
Opposing Traffic
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
(Continued)
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
WARNING!
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately
3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
3
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime
Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings/ will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected object are present on the same side at the same
Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding
time, both the visual and audible alerts will be issued. In
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
muted.
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM NOTE: Whenever an audible alert is requested by the
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side BSM system, the radio is also muted.
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
the system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
the system will respond with both visual and audible both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the
audible alert is requested, the radio is muted.
RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
Blind Spot Alert Off
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro- When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
systems.
Modes Of Operation
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating SEATS
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle Seats are part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and vehicle.
used.
General Information
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada
Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
other than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
3
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Seats — If Equipped
Some models may be equipped with eight-way power
driver and front passenger seats. The power seat switches
are located on the outboard side of the seat. There are two
switches that control the movement of the seat cushion
and the seatback.
Power Seat Switches
1 — Seatback Switch
2 — Seat Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
Reclining The Seatback
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of
the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
(Continued)
3
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the
power seat. Push the switch forward to increase the
lumbar support. Push the switch rearward to decrease
the lumbar support. Pushing upward or downward on
the switch will raise and lower the position of the
support.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
Power Lumbar Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located under
the seat cushion and move the seat forward or rearward.
Release the bar once you have reached the desired
Some models may be equipped with a manual front
position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and
passenger seat. The seat can be adjusted forward or
rearward by using a bar located by the front of the seat rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters
have latched.
cushion, near the floor.
Manual Front Seats Forward/Rearward
Adjustment
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Adjustment Bar
3
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Front Passenger Seatback Adjustment —
Recline
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift
the lever, lean forward and release the lever.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Front Passenger Seat Fold-Flat Feature — If
Equipped
To fold the seatback to the flat load-floor position, lift the
recline lever and push the seatback forward. To return to
the seating position, raise the seatback and lock it into
place.
Recline Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
WARNING!
Fold-Flat Passenger Seat
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front and rear seats may be
equipped with heaters located in the seat cushions and
seat backs.
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
3
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
will change from HI to LO, indicating the change. The
LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after apThe front heated seats control buttons are located within
proximately 45 minutes.
the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
NOTE:
You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. The
indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in • Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within
use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for
two to five minutes.
LO and none for OFF.
• The engine must be running for the heated seats to
once to turn the HI
• Press the heated seat button
operate.
setting ON.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
• Press the heated seat button
a second time to turn
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
the LO setting ON.
heated seats can be programed to come on during a
• Press the heated seat button
a third time to turn remote start.
the heating elements OFF.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect®
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will auto- system. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understandmatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 min- ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
utes of continuous operation. At that time, the display
Front Heated Seats
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. Amber
On some models, the two rear outboard seats may be indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in
equipped with heated seats. There are two heated seat use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for
LO and none for OFF.
switches that allow the rear passengers to operate the
seats independently. The heated seat switches for each
Press the switch once to select HI-level heating.
heater are located on the rear of the center console.
Press the switch a second time to select LOlevel heating. Press the switch a third time to
shut the heating elements OFF.
Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the
system will automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that
time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two
to one, indicating the change. The LO-level setting will
turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
Rear Heated Seat Switches
3
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
Located in the seat cushion and seat back are small fans
that draw the air from the passenger compartment and
move air through fine perforations in the seat cover to
help keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher
ambient temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds,
HI and LO.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located
within the Uconnect® system. You can gain access to the
control buttons through the climate screen or the controls
screen.
• Press the ventilated seat button
once to choose HI.
• Press the ventilated seat button
choose LO.
a second time to
• Press the ventilated seat button
turn the ventilated seat OFF.
a third time to
NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
ventilated seats can be programed to come on during a
remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect®
system. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rearimpact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
Active Head Restraints — Front Seats
Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
identified by any markings, only through visual inspection of the head restraint. The Active Head Restraints
(AHR) will be split in two halves, with the front half
being soft foam and trim, the back half being decorative
plastic.
3
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to reduce the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is design to reduce the risk of injury to the
driver or front passenger in certain types of rear impacts.
Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and
push downward on the head restraint.
Adjustment Button
For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted
forward and rearward. To tilt the head restraint closer to
the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of the
head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head
restraint to move the head restraint away from your
head.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
3
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
NOTE:
• The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• In the event of deployment of an Active Head Restraint, refer to “Occupant Restraints/Resetting Active
Head Restraints (AHR)” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable
DVD players. These items may interfere with the
operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event
of a collision and could result in serious injury or
death.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are
struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured,
as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to follow this
warning could cause personal injury if the Active
Head Restraint is deployed.
Head Restraints — Rear Seats
The head restraints on the outboard seats are not adjustable. They automatically fold forward when the rear seat
is folded to a load floor position but do not return to their
normal position when the rear seat is raised. After
returning either seat to its upright position, raise the head
restraint until it locks in place. The outboard head
restraints are not removable.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
The center head restraint has limited adjustment. Lift
upward on the head restraint to raise it, or push downward on the head restraint to lower it.
WARNING!
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered
position could result in serious injury or death in a
collision. Always make sure the outboard head restraints are in their upright positions when the seat is
to be occupied.
NOTE: For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether, refer to
“Occupant Restraints” in “Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
60/40 Split Rear Seat
To Lower Rear Seat
Rear Head Restraint
Either side of the rear seat can be lowered to allow for
extended cargo space and still maintain some rear seating
room.
3
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and NOTE:
positioned forward. This will allow the rear seatback to
• Do not fold the 60% rear seat down with the left
fold down easily.
outboard or rear center seat belt buckled.
1. Pull upward on the release lever to release the seat.
• Do not fold the 40% rear seat down with the right
outboard seat belt buckled.
2. Fold the rear seat completely forward.
Rear Seat Release
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
WARNING!
Rear Seat Folded
To Raise Rear Seat
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children should
be seated and using the proper restraint system.
Reclining Rear Seat
Raise the rear seatback and lock it into place. If interference from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully To recline the seatback, lift the lever located on the
locking, you will have difficulty returning the seat to its outboard side of the seat, lean back and release the lever
at the desired position. To return the seatback, lift the
proper position.
lever, lean forward and release the lever.
3
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
memory profiles for easy recall through a memory
switch. Each memory profile contains desired position
settings for the driver seat, side mirrors, and power tilt
and telescopic steering column (if equipped) and a set of
desired radio station presets. Your Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter can also be programmed to recall the
same positions when the UNLOCK button is pressed.
Rear Seat Release
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with two RKE transmitters, one RKE transmitter can be linked to memory
position 1 and the other transmitter can be linked to
memory position 2.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
The memory seat switch is located on the driver’s door Programming The Memory Feature
trim panel. The switch consists of three buttons:
NOTE: To create a new memory profile, perform the
• The (S) button, which is used to activate the memory following:
save function.
1. Cycle the vehicles ignition to the ON/RUN position
• The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall either
(Do not start the engine).
of two pre-programmed memory profiles.
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror, power tilt and telescopic
steering column [if equipped], and radio station presets).
3. Press and release the S (Set) button on the memory
switch.
4. Within five seconds, press and release either of the
memory buttons (1) or (2). The Driver Information
Display (DID) will display which memory position
has been set.
Memory Seat Switch
3
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
To program your RKE transmitters, perform the following:
• Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in 1. Cycle the vehicles ignition to the OFF position.
PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a
2. Select a desired memory profile (1) or (2).
memory profile.
NOTE: If a memory profile has not already been set,
• To set a memory profile to your RKE transmitter, refer
refer to #Programming The Memory Feature# in this
to “Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
section for instructions on how to set a memory profile.
Transmitter To Memory” in this section.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and release
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
the SET (S) button on the memory switch.
Transmitter To Memory
Your RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one 4. Within five seconds, push and release button (1) or (2)
accordingly. “Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display
of two pre-programmed memory profiles by pushng the
in the instrument cluster.
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
NOTE: Before programming your RKE transmitters you 5. Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter within 10 seconds.
must select the “Memory To FOB” feature through the
Uconnect® system screen. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings ”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
NOTE: Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your Driver Two Memory Position Recall
memory settings by pushing the SET (S) button, and
• To recall the memory setting for driver two using the
within 10 seconds, followed by pushing the UNLOCK
memory switch, press MEMORY button number 2 on
button on the RKE transmitter.
the memory switch.
Memory Position Recall
• To recall the memory settings for driver two using the
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
RKE transmitter, press the UNLOCK button on the
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2.
in PARK, a message will be displayed in the Driver
A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the
Information Display (DID).
MEMORY buttons during a recall (S, 1, or 2). When a
recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat, steering column (if
Driver One Memory Position Recall
equipped) and pedals (if equipped) stop moving. A delay
• To recall the memory settings for driver one using the of one second will occur before another recall can be
memory switch , press MEMORY button number 1 on
selected.
the memory switch.
• To recall the memory settings for driver one using the
RKE transmitter, press the UNLOCK button on the
RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1.
3
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
driver seat position is less than 0.9 in (22.7 mm)
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit
vehicle.
or Easy Entry.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
you have the driver seat positioned when you cycle the
Entry and Easy Exit position.
vehicles ignition to the OFF position.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when
• When you cycle the vehicles ignition to the OFF
position, the driver seat will move about 2.4 in (60 the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy
Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through
mm) rearward if the driver seat position is greater than
or equal to 2.7 in (67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. the programmable features in the Uconnect® system.
Refer to “Uconnect® Settings/Customer Programmable
The seat will return to its previously set position when
Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
you cycle the vehicles ignition to the ACC or RUN
further information.
position.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
2. Reach under the hood, move safety latch to the left
and lift the hood.
1. Pull the release lever located below the instrument
panel and in front of the driver’s door.
3
Safety Latch Location
Hood Release
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the front center
of the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel, next to the steering wheel. The headlight switch controls the operation of the headlights,
parking lights, instrument panel lights, cargo lights and
fog lights (if equipped).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
NOTE:
• Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and
fog light (if equipped) lenses that are lighter and less
susceptible to stone breakage than glass lights. Plastic
is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
• To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses
and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry
cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap
solution followed by rinsing.
Headlight Switch
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise. When the headlight switch is
on, the parking lights, taillights, license plate
light and instrument panel lights are also
turned on. To turn off the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch back to the O (Off) position.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,
steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the
lenses.
3
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
through the Uconnect® system screen. Refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your InstruThis system automatically turns the headlights on or off
ment Panel” for further information.
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
If your vehicle is equipped with a “Rain Sensitive Wiper
rotate the headlight switch to the A (AUTO) position.
System” and it is activated, the headlights will automatiWhen the system is on, the Headlight Delay feature is
cally turn on after the wipers complete five wipe cycles
also on. This means the headlights will stay on for up to
within approximately one minute, and they will turn off
90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the OFF
approximately four minutes after the wipers completely
position. To turn the automatic headlights off, turn the
stop. Refer to “Windshield Wipers And Washers” in this
headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
section for further information.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headNOTE: When your headlights come on during the daylights will turn on in the Automatic Mode.
time, the instrument panel lights will automatically dim
Headlights On Automatically With Wipers
to the lower nighttime intensity.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights, it
also has this customer-programmable feature. When
your headlights are in the automatic mode and the
engine is running, they will automatically turn on when
the wiper system is on. This feature is programmable
Automatic High Beam — If Equipped
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera
mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp
from high beams to low beams until the approaching Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed
vehicle is out of view.
to ensure proper performance. See your local authorized
dealer.
NOTE:
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
• The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to The Daytime Running Lights (low intensity) come on
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru- whenever the engine is running, and the transmission is
not in the PARK position. The lights will remain on until
ment Panel” for further information.
the ignition is switched to the OFF or ACC position or the
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
parking brake is engaged.
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, NOTE: If a turn signal is activated, the DRL lamp on the
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera same side of the vehicle will turn off for the duration of
lens will cause the system to function improperly.
the turn signal activation. Once the turn signal is no
longer active, the DRL lamp will illuminate.
• To opt out of the Advanced Auto High-Beam Sensitivity
Control (default) and enter Reduced High-Beam Sensitiv- The headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime
ity Control (not recommended), toggle highbeam lever 6 driving.
full on/off cycles within 10 seconds of ignition ON.
System will return to default setting upon ignition off.
3
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The Adaptive Headlight System can be turned On or Off
using the Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
This feature prevents the headlights from interfering
further information.
with the vision of oncoming drivers. Headlight leveling
automatically adjusts the height of the headlight beam in Headlight Delay
reaction to changes in vehicle pitch.
To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a
Adaptive Bi-Xenon High Intensity Discharge
headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for
Headlights — If Equipped
approximately up to 90 seconds. This delay is initiated
This system automatically swivels the headlight beam when the ignition is turned OFF while the headlight
pattern horizontally to provide increased illumination in switch is on, and then the headlight switch is cycled off.
Headlight delay can be cancelled by either turning the
the direction the vehicle is steering.
headlight switch on then off, or by turning the ignition
NOTE:
ON.
Automatic Headlight Leveling — HID Headlights
Only
• Each time the Adaptive Headlight System is turned on, NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen,
the headlights will initialize by performing a brief this feature can be programmed through the Uconnect®
sequence of rotations.
system. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understand• The Adaptive Headlight System is active only when ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
the vehicle is moving forward.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this
feature can be programmed through the Driver Information Display (DID). Refer to “Driver Information Display
(DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
3
Parking Lights And Panel Lights
To turn on the parking lights and instrument
panel lights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise.
To turn off the parking lights, rotate the headlight switch
back to the O (Off) position.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
Fog Light Operation
The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights
The fog lights are turned on by rotating the headlight are on or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam.
switch to the parking light or headlight position and An indicator light located in the instrument cluster will
pushing in the headlight rotary control.
illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog lights will
turn off when the switch is pushed a second time, when
the headlight switch is rotated to the off position, or the
high beam is selected.
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
to its farthest position up until you hear a click. This
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front feature is termed the “Parade” mode and is useful when
doors are opened or when the dimmer control (rotating headlights are required during the day.
wheel on the right side of the headlight switch) is rotated
to its farthest upward position. If your vehicle is
equipped with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) and the
UNLOCK button is pressed on the RKE transmitter the
courtesy and dome lights will turn on. When a door is
open and the interior lights are on, rotating the dimmer
control all the way down, to the OFF detent, will cause all
the interior lights to go out. This is also known as the
“Party” mode because it allows the doors to stay open for
extended periods of time without discharging the vehicle’s battery.
Interior Lights
The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be
regulated by rotating the dimmer control up (brighter) or
down (dimmer). When the headlights are on you can
supplement the brightness of the odometer, trip odometer, radio and overhead console by rotating the control
Dimmer Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
Lights-On Reminder
Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left on The front map/reading lights are mounted in the overafter the ignition is turned OFF, a chime will sound when head console.
the driver’s door is opened.
Battery Saver
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, load shedding
is provided for both the interior and exterior lights.
If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for 10
minutes or the dimmer control is rotated all the way up
to the dome ON position for 10 minutes, the interior
lights will automatically turn off.
NOTE: Battery saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is
ON.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled
Front Map/Reading Lights
OFF, the exterior lights will automatically turn off after
eight minutes. If the headlights are turned on and left on Each light can be turned on by pushing a switch on either
for eight minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior side of the console. These buttons are backlit for night
time visibility. To turn the lights off, push the switch a
lights will automatically turn off.
3
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
second time. The lights will also turn on when the Courtesy Lights
UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) is The courtesy lights can be turned on by pushing the top
pushed.
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, push the lens a
second time.
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
Courtesy Lights
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
Ambient Light — If Equipped
Multifunction Lever
The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
feature. This light casts illumination for improved visibil- steering column.
ity of the floor and center console area.
Multifunction Lever
Ambient Light
3
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Turn Signals
Flash-To-Pass
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steerproper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights. ing wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to
turn on until the lever is released.
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside High/Low Beam Switch
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is panel to switch the headlights to high beam. Pulling the
defective.
multifunction back toward the steering wheel will turn
Lane Change Assist
the low beams back on, or shut the high beams off.
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the
three times then automatically turn off.
multifunction lever on the left side of the steering column. The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch,
located on the end of the lever. For information on the
rear wiper/washer, refer to “Rear Window Features” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
3
Multifunction Lever
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four detent
positions for intermittent settings, the fifth detent for low
wiper operation and the sixth detent for high wiper
operation.
Windshield Wiper Operation
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
“park” position. If the windshield wiper switch is
(Continued)
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
turned off, and the blades cannot return to the “park”
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings when
weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a
variable delay between cycles, desirable. At driving
speeds above 10 mph (16 km/h), the delay can be
regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds
between cycles (first detent), to a cycle every one second
(fourth detent).
Intermittent Wiper Operation
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph
(16 km/h), delay times will be doubled.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, push on the end of the lever (toward
the steering wheel) and hold while spray is desired. If the
lever is pushed while in the intermittent setting, the
wipers will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles
after the end of the lever is released, and then resume the
intermittent interval previously selected.
3
Windshield Washer Operation
If the end of the lever is pushed while the wipers are in
the off position, the wipers will operate for several wipe
cycles, then turn off.
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Mist
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make
occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Rotate the end
of the lever downward to the Mist position and release
for a single wiping cycle.
Mist Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the windThis feature senses moisture on the windshield and
shield.
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray • Use of Rain-X® or products containing wax or silicone
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings
• The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off
to activate this feature.
using the Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect®
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position one is the least
for further information.
sensitive, and wiper delay position four is the most
sensitive. Setting three should be used for normal rain The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
conditions. Settings one and two can be used if the driver
desires less wiper sensitivity. Setting four can be used if following conditions:
the driver desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch • Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is
in the OFF position when not using the system.
first turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
NOTE:
is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside tem• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
perature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
3
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the
ignition is ON, and the automatic transmission is in
the NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will
not operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle
speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), or the shift
lever/gear selector is moved out of the NEUTRAL
position.
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is
located below the steering wheel at the end of the
steering column.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped
with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are
not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start
mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed
the ignition switch in the RUN position, rain sensing
wiper operation can resume, if it has been selected, and
no other inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) exist.
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
To unlock the steering column, push the lever downward
(toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the
steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To
lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering
wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the
steering column in position, push the lever upward until
fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
— IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping
steering column lever is located below the multifunction
lever on the steering column.
3
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat,
you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel
to return the tilt/telescopic steering column to preprogrammed positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat”
in this section for further information.
WARNING!
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
To tilt the steering column, move the lever up or down as
desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as
desired.
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for up
to 80 minutes before automatically shutting off. The
heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn
on when the steering wheel is already warm.
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on
during a remote start through the Uconnect® system.
Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
The heated steering wheel control button is located within
the Uconnect® system. You can gain access to the control
button through the climate screen or the controls screen.
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise
care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
turn the heating element ON.
once to
• Press the heated steering wheel button
time to turn the heating element OFF.
a second
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
WARNING!
(Continued)
3
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 — ON/OFF
2 — SET+/ACCEL
3 — RESUME
4 — SET-/DECEL
5 — CANCEL
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Activate
To Set A Desired Speed
Push the ON/OFF button to activate the electronic speed
control. CRUISE CONTROL READY will appear on the
instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control
is on. To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a
second time. CRUISE CONTROL OFF will appear on the
instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control
is off. The system should be turned off when not in use.
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-)
button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed. Once a speed has
been set a message CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH
(km/h) will appear indicating what speed was set. A
CRUISE indicator lamp, along with set speed will also
appear and stay on in the instrument cluster when the
speed is set.
3
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “UnderA soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control withspeed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
out erasing the set speed from memory.
Pushing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition U.S. Speed (mph)
To Deactivate
switch OFF erases the set speed from memory.
To Resume Speed
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
the new set speed will be established.
To Vary The Speed Setting
Metric Speed (km/h)
To Increase Speed
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can inincrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
crease speed by pushing the SET + button.
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
the new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
Metric Speed (km/h)
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can de- • Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
crease speed by pushing the SET - button.
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under- • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
the new set speed will be established.
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
To Accelerate For Passing
U.S. Speed (mph)
Push the accelerator as you would normally. When the
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
3
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on EQUIPPED
moderate hills is normal.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so convenience provided by cruise control while traveling
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.
Control.
Electronic Speed Control function performs differently.
Please refer to the proper section within this chapter.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in
light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar
sensor and a forward facing camera designed to detect a
vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you,
ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed buttons. The two control modes function differently.
the original set speed) automatically to maintain a Always confirm which mode is selected.
preset following distance, while matching the speed of
the vehicle ahead.
WARNING!
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an
appropriate distance between vehicles.
• Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control mode
for cruising at a constant preset speed. For additional
information, refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control Mode” in this section.
NOTE: Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control
will not react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of
the mode selected.
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather
conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of
your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
(Continued)
3
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• The ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,
and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions into account, and may be limited upon
adverse sight distance conditions.
• Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
• Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while
following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle
for 2 seconds in the stop position. If the target
vehicle does not start moving within two seconds
the ACC system will display a message that the
system will release the brakes and that the
brakes must be applied manually. An audible
chime will sound when the brakes are released.
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e.,
in highway construction zones).
• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snowcovered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes.
(Continued)
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
WARNING! (Continued)
• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
3
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the
steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
— NORMAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF
— SET+/ACCEL
— RESUME
— SET-/DECEL
— DISTANCE SETTING — INCREASE
— ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF
— DISTANCE SETTING — DECREASE
— CANCEL
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications • When you apply the brakes.
to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive
• When the parking brake is set.
Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning System.
• When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REActivating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
VERSE or NEUTRAL.
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above
• When the Vehicle speed is outside of the speed range.
0 mph (0 km/h).
The minimum Set Speed for the ACC system is 20 mph • When the brakes are overheated.
(32 km/h).
• When the driver door is open.
When the system is turned on and in the READY state, • When the driver seat belt is unbuckled.
the Driver Information Display (DID) displays “ACC
To Activate/Deactivate
Ready.”
When the system is OFF, the DID displays “Adaptive Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in the DID displays
Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
“ACC Ready.”
NOTE: You cannot engage ACC under the following
conditions:
• When in Four-Wheel Drive Low.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
3
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
To turn the system OFF, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button again. At this
time, the system will turn off and the DID will display
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system
on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you
(Continued)
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
want. You could lose control and have a collision.
Always leave the system off when you are not using
it.
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET + button or the SET - button and release. The DID
will display the set speed.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do
not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs:
• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in
the DID.
• The system will not be controlling the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle
speed will only be determined by the position of the
accelerator pedal.
If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is below To Cancel
20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be defaulted to
The following conditions cancel the system:
20 mph (32 km/h). If the system is Set when the vehicle
speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be • The brake pedal is applied.
the current speed of the vehicle.
• The CANCEL button is pushed.
NOTE: ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle
• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
• The shift lever/gear selector is removed from the • The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
ON/OFF button is pushed.
Drive position.
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys- • The ignition is turned OFF.
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
• You switch to Four-Wheel Drive Low.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
To Resume
• Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds.
If there is a set speed in memory push the RES (resume)
• Driver door is opened at low speeds.
• A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs.
• The driver switches ESC to full-off mode.
button and then remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal. The DID will display the last set speed.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than two
seconds, then the system will cancel and the brake
The system will turn off and clear the set speed in
force will be ramped-out. The driver will have to apply
memory if:
the brakes to keep the vehicle at a standstill.
To Turn Off
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button • ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle
is pushed.
in-front of your vehicle in close proximity.
3
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
pushing the SET + button.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the DID.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
button is released. The decrease in set speed is rein the DID.
flected in the DID.
To Decrease Speed
Metric Speed (km/h)
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by • Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
pushing the SET - button.
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under- • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
button is released. The decrease in set speed is respeed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
flected in the DID.
U.S. Speed (mph)
NOTE:
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph • When you override and push the SET + button or SET
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
- buttons, the new Set Speed will be the current speed
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
of the vehicle.
3
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
will automatically slow the vehicle.
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
• The ACC system applies the brake down to a full stop Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
when following a target vehicle. If an ACC host vehicle calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
follows a target vehicle to a standstill, the host vehicle distance setting displays in the DID.
will release the vehicle brakes two seconds after coming to a full stop.
• The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting
may occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This is normal operation and necessary to maintain set speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the
ACC system will cancel if the braking temperature
exceeds normal range (overheated).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
3
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)
Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long)
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)
Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance Setting
— Increase button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar (longer).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance Set- • The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
ting — Decrease button and release. Each time the button
ACC Activation).
is pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; how(shorter).
ever, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the necessary.
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
same lane, the DID displays the “Sensed Vehicle IndicaACC system applies the brakes.
tor” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of the set A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to
speed.
maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
“BRAKE” will flash in the DID and a chime will sound
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
speed.
capacity.
• The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
the sensor.
• The distance setting is changed.
3
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a Target
vehicle, the system will provide an additional acceleration to assist in passing vehicles in front. This additional
acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the left
or right turn signal. The Overtake Aid will only provide
additional acceleration if the vehicle moves with the
corresponding turn signal and until the current set speed
is reached. The ACC system will automatically detect
traffic direction in the respective lane when the right or
left turn signal is utilized.
Brake Alert
NOTE: The “Brake!” Screen in the DID is a warning for
the driver to take action and does not necessarily mean
that the Forward Collision Warning system is applying
the brakes autonomously.
ACC Operation At Stop
If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill
while following a target vehicle, if the target vehicle starts
moving within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a
standstill, your vehicle will resume motion without the
need for any driver action.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
If the target vehicle does not start moving within two
WARNING! (Continued)
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the ACC
these
warnings
can result in a collision and death or
with Stop system will cancel and the brakes will release.
serious
personal
injury.
A cancel message will display on the DID and produce a
warning chime. Driver intervention will be required at
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
this moment.
The DID displays the current ACC system settings. The
While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle at a
DID is located in the center of the instrument cluster. The
standstill, if the driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the driver
information it displays depends on ACC system status.
door is opened, the ACC with Stop system will cancel
and the brakes will release. A cancel message will display Push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/
on the DID and produce a warning chime. Driver inter- OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of
the following displays in the DID:
vention will be required at this moment.
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or
objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow
(Continued)
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
3
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
• ACC Unavailable Warning
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has • The DID will return to the last display selected after
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
five seconds of no ACC display activity
Control Ready.”
Display Warnings And Maintenance
Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
wheel) and the following will display in the DID:
Warning
ACC SET
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the warning will display and also a chime will indicate when
instrument cluster.
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as
activity occurs, which may include any of the following: in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud,
• System Cancel
dirt or ice. In these cases, the DID will display “ACC/
• Driver Override
FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” and the
system will deactivate.
• System Off
• ACC Proximity Warning
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or
ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path
this warning may temporarily occur.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is important to note the following maintenance items:
• Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage
the sensor lens.
• Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
require a sensor realignment.
Sensor” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control is still available. For additional information refer • If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due
to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service.
section.
• Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles. DoIf weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
ing so could cause an ACC system failure or malfunction.
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
vehicle behind the lower grille.
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
simply reactivating it.
3
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and
fog on the inside of glass. In these cases, the DID will
• If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
display “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than
Windshield” and the system will have degraded perforonce on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
mance.
other obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
your authorized dealer.
Windshield” message can sometimes be displayed while
• Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an afterdriving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW
market grille or modifying the grille is not recomsystem will recover after the vehicle has left these areas.
mended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit
Under rare conditions, when the camera is not tracking
ACC/FCW operation.
any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may
temporarily occur.
“Clean Front Windshield” Warning
NOTE:
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” warning will display and also a chime will
indicate when conditions temporarily limit system performance. This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC
system may also become temporarily blinded due to
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the windshield and the camera located on the
back side of the inside rear view mirror. They may
require cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
When the condition that created limited functionality is Precautions While Driving With ACC
no longer present, the system will return to full function- In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
ality.
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectNOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean edly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to
Front Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more intervene.
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or Towing A Trailer
other obstruction, have the windshield and forward
Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
facing camera inspected at your authorized dealer.
Service ACC/FCW Warning
Offset Driving
If the system turns off, and the DID displays “ACC/FCW
Unavailable Service Required” or “Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required”, there may be an internal system
fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under
normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable.
If this occurs, try activating ACC again later, following an
ignition cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging
in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance
to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and
out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
3
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume
your original Set Speed. This is a part of normal ACC
system functionality.
NOTE: On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
Offset Driving Condition Example
Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for
stability reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once
Turn Or Bend Example
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
Using ACC On Hills
Lane Changing
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be limited.
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and
it may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until
it is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
ACC Hill Example
3
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
Lane Changing Example
Narrow Vehicle Example
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
General Information
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and
the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be
attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada
Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
other than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
3
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
Mode
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal
(Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mode is available
for cruising at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed)
Electronic Speed Control mode is designed to maintain a
set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate
the accelerator. Electronic Speed Control can only be
operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h).
WARNING!
In the normal Cruise Control mode, the system will
not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since
neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
selected.
To change between the different control modes, push the
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF button
which turns the ACC and the NORMAL (Fixed Speed) To Set A Desired Speed
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL OFF. Pushing of the
NORMAL (Fixed Speed) ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTurn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic
TROL ON/OFF button will result in turning ON (changSpeed Control ON. When the vehicle has
ing to) the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Conreached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or
trol mode.
SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
Once a speed has been set a message (CRUISE CON- • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
TROL SET TO MPH/KM) will appear indicating what
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
speed was set. This light will turn on when the electronic
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
speed control is SET.
in the DID display.
To Vary The Speed Setting
Metric Speed (km/h)
To Increase Speed
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET + button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Underbutton is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
in the DID display.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of
U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
To Decrease Speed
U.S. Speed (mph)
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set,
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph you can decrease speed by pushing the SET - button.
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
3
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Undercontinue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reThe speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed
flected in the DID display.
of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
To Cancel
U.S. Speed (mph)
The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph Speed) Electronic Speed Control without clearing the
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the memory:
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• The brake pedal is applied.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will • The CANCEL button is pushed.
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re- • The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
flected in the DID display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h • The braking temperature exceeds normal range (overheated).
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
• The shift lever/gear selector is removed from the FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH
Drive position.
MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
To Resume Speed
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button Operation
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system with
20 mph (32 km/h).
mitigation provides the driver with audible warnings,
visual warnings (within the DID), and may apply a brake
To Turn Off
jerk to warn the driver when it detects a potential frontal
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in collision. The warnings and limited braking are intended
memory if:
to provide the driver with enough time to react, avoid or
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mitigate the potential collision.
ON/OFF button is pushed.
• The ignition is turned off.
• You engage Four-Wheel Drive Low.
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off button is
pushed.
3
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller
(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision.
When the system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning. If
the driver does not take action based upon these progressive warnings, then the system will provide a limited
level of active braking to help slow the vehicle and
mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver
reacts to the warnings by braking and the system determines that the driver intends to avoid the collision by
FCW Message
braking but has not applied sufficient brake force, the
system will compensate and provide additional brake When the system determines a collision with the vehicle
in front of you is no longer probable, the warning
force as required.
message will be deactivated.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
NOTE:
• The minimum speed for FCW activation is 5 mph
(8 km/h).
• The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than
vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of
normal FCW activation and functionality.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect
every type of potential collision. The driver has the
responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow
this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
• It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such Turning FCW ON Or OFF
misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events
within an ignition cycle, the Active Braking portion of NOTE: The default status of FCW is “On”, this allows
FCW will be deactivated until the next ignition cycle. the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you.
• The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If
the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should The forward collision button is located on the switch
be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the panel below the Uconnect® display.
surroundings. If the vehicle enters 4WD Low Range, To turn the FCW system OFF, push the forward collision
the FCW system will be automatically deactivated.
button once to turn the system OFF (led turns on).
3
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To turn the FCW system back ON, push the forward Changing FCW And Active Braking Status
collision button again to turn the system ON (led turns The FCW Sensitivity And Active Braking Settings are
off).
programmable through the Uconnect® System. Refer to
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrufrom warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle ment Panel” for further information.
in front of you.
The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting and the
Changing the Active Braking status to “Off” prevents the
system from providing limited autonomous braking, or
additional brake support if the driver is not braking
adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision.
Active Braking is the “On” setting, this allows the system
to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front of you when you are farther away and it applies
limited braking. This gives you the most reaction time to
avoid a possible collision.
NOTE: The FCW system state is kept in memory from
one ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF, Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
it will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
vehicle in front of you when you are much closer. This
setting provides less reaction time than the “Far” setting,
which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
fully available. Once the condition that limited the system performance is no longer present, the system will
• The system will retain the last setting selected by the
return to its full performance state. If the problem perdriver after ignition shut down.
sists, see your authorized dealer.
• FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as Service FCW Warning
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in the
path of the car, stationary objects that are far away, If the system turns off, and the DID displays:
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or • ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
higher rate of speed.
• Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
• FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although
screens.
the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have
FCW Limited Warning
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
If the DID displays “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality”
or “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind- PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
shield” momentarily, there may be a condition that limits EQUIPPED
FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist system provides visual
under normal conditions, the active braking may not be and audible indications of the distance between the rear
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
NOTE:
3
222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
during a parking maneuver. Refer to ParkSense® System ParkSense® Sensors
Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/
recommendations.
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within
ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in (200 cm) from
the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, dependchanged to the ON/RUN position.
ing on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
ParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever/gear
selector is in REVERSE. If ParkSense® is enabled at this ParkSense® Warning Display
shift lever/gear selector position, the system will remain The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if
active until the vehicle speed is increased to approxi- Sound and Display is selected from the Customer mately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. When in REVERSE Programmable Features section of the Uconnect® Sysand above the system’s operating speed, a warning will tem. Refer to #Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding
appear within the Driver Information Display (DID) Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
indicating the vehicle speed is too fast. The system will The ParkSense® Warning screen is located within the
become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to DID. It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance
speeds less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
between the rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)” for
further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the DID will display the region, the display will show a single arc in the left
and/or right rear region and the system will produce a
park assist ready system status.
tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from a single 1/2 second
tone to slow, to fast, to continuous.
ParkSense® Display
Park Assist Ready
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in the left and/or right rear regions based on
the obstacle’s distance and location relative to the vehicle.
3
224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Single 1/2 Second Tone
Slow Tone
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225
3
Fast Tone
Continuous Tone
226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
Arc
Greater than
79 in (200 cm)
None
Radio Volume
Reduced
No
None
WARNING ALERTS
79-39 in
39-25 in
(200-100 cm)
(100-65 cm)
Single 1/2
Slow
Second Tone
4th Solid
3rd
Solid
Yes
Yes
NOTE: ParkSense® will reduce the volume of the radio,
if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Fast
Less than
12 in (30 cm)
Continuous
2nd
Flashing
Yes
1st
Flashing
Yes
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Rear chime volume settings can be selected from the
Customer-Programmable Features section of the
Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information. When the
shift lever/gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the
system is disabled, the DID will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is
in REVERSE.
The ParkSense® switch LED will be ON when
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and
ParkSense® is disabled or requires service. The
HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
ParkSense® switch LED will be OFF when the system is
ParkSense® will retain its last known configuration state enabled. If the ParkSense® switch is pushed, and the
through ignition cycles.
system requires service, the ParkSense® switch LED will
blink momentarily, and then the LED will be ON.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense®
ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled with the Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist System
ParkSense® switch.
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense® Rear Park
When the ParkSense® switch is pushed to Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the
disable the system, the instrument cluster will instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per
display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for ignition cycle, and it will display the “PARKSENSE
approximately five seconds. Refer to “Driver UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or the
3
228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
message. Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)” for
further information. When the shift lever/gear selector is
moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a
faulted condition, the DID will display the #PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE
WIPE
REAR
SENSORS#
or
#PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED#
message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under
this condition, ParkSense® will not operate.
Cleaning The ParkSense® System
Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
ParkSense® System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENdirt and debris to keep the ParkSense® system operSORS” appears in the Driver Information Display (DID)
ating properly.
make sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear
fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt • Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense®.
or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the
message continues to appear, see an authorized dealer.
• When you turn ParkSense® OFF, the instrument clusIf “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
ter will display “PARKSENSE OFF” Furthermore, once
appears in the DID, see an authorized dealer.
you turn ParkSense® off, it remains off until you turn
it on again, even if you cycle the ignition.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229
• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense® is turned OFF, the DID will
display “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor
problem, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the
DID.
• ParkSense®, when on, will reduce the volume of the • ParkSense® should be disabled when the liftgate is in
radio when it is sounding a tone.
the open position and the vehicle is in REVERSE. An
open liftgate could provide a false indication that an
• Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care
obstacle is behind the vehicle.
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
CAUTION!
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense® system might not detect an • ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
bumper.
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
• Use the ParkSense® switch to turn the ParkSense®
close proximity.
system OFF if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer
hitches, etc. are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the
rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
(Continued)
3
230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using ParkSense®.
• Before using ParkSense®, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense®. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
(Continued)
PARKSENSE® FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST
— IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense® Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear
and/or front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231
up or moving forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver. ParkSense® Sensors
Refer to ParkSense® System Usage Precautions for limi- The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/
tations of this system and recommendations.
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
changed to the ON/RUN position.
direction, depending on the location, type and orientaParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever is in tion of the obstacle.
REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense® is enabled at one of
these shift lever positions, the system will remain active The six ParkSense® sensors, located in the front fascia/
until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is
7 mph (11 km/h) or above. A display warning will within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
appear in the Driver Information Display (DID) indicat- obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 47 in
ing the vehicle is above ParkSense® operating speed. The (120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the horizontal
system will become active again if the vehicle speed is direction, depending on the location, type and orientadecreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph tion of the obstacle.
(9 km/h).
3
232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ParkSense® Warning Display
The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer Programmable Features section of the Uconnect® System. Refer to #Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The ParkSense® Warning screen is located within the
Driver Information Display (DID). It provides visual
warnings to indicate the distance between the rear
fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to “Driver Information Display
(DID)” for further information.
Park Assist Ready
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
ParkSense® Display
a single arc in the left and/or right rear regions based on
The warning display will turn ON indicating the system the object’s distance and location relative to the vehicle.
status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the
vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle has been detected. If an object is detected in the left and/or right rear region,
the display will show a single arc in the left and/or right
rear region and the system will produce a tone. As the
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233
vehicle moves closer to the object, the display will show
the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone
will change from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast,
to continuous.
3
Slow Tone
Single 1/2 Second Tone
234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Fast Tone
Continuous Tone
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the DID display
shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone.
The following chart shows the warning alert operation
when the system is detecting an obstacle:
3
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Front Distance
(in/cm)
Audible Alert
(Chime)
Greater than 79
in (200 cm)
Greater than 47
in (120 cm)
None
Arcs
Radio Volume
Reduced
None
No
WARNING
79-39 in
(200-100 cm)
47-39 in
(120-100 cm)
Single 1/2
Second Tone
(for rear only)
4th Solid
Yes
NOTE: ParkSense® will reduce the volume of the radio,
if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
ALERTS
39-25 in
(100-65 cm)
39-25 in
(100-65 cm)
Slow (for rear
only)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Fast
Less than 12 in
(30 cm)
Less than 12 in
(30 cm)
Continuous
3rd Solid
Yes
2nd Flashing
Yes
1st Flashing
Yes
236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense®
ParkSense® will turn off the Front Park Assist audible ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled with the
alert (chime) after approximately 3 seconds when an ParkSense® switch.
obstacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and
When the ParkSense® switch is pushed to
brake pedal is applied.
disable the system, the instrument cluster will
display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
approximately five seconds. Refer to “Driver
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected
Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your
from the Uconnect® System. Refer to #Uconnect® SetInstrument Panel” for further information. When the
tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
shift lever/gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the
further information.
system is disabled, the DID will display the
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is
HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM. in REVERSE.
ParkSense® will retain its last known configuration state The ParkSense® switch LED will be ON when
through ignition cycles.
ParkSense® is disabled or requires service. The
ParkSense® switch LED will be OFF when the system is
enabled. If the ParkSense® switch is pushed, and the
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237
system requires service, the ParkSense® switch LED will graphic will be displayed with #UNAVAILABLE# at either the front or rear sensor location depending on where
blink momentarily, and then the LED will be ON.
the fault is detected. The system will continue to provide
Service The ParkSense® Park Assist System
arc alerts for the side that is functioning properly. These
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense® System arc alerts will interrupt the #PARKSENSE UNAVAILhas detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster ABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS#, #PARKSENSE UNAVAILwill actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it ABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS#, or #PARKSENSE UNwill display the #PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE AVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED# messages if an object
REAR SENSORS#, #PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE is detected within the five second pop-up duration. The
FRONT SENSORS#, or the #PARKSENSE UNAVAIL- car graphic will remain displayed for as long as the
ABLE SERVICE REQUIRED# message for five seconds. vehicle is in REVERSE. Refer to “Driver Information
When the shift lever/gear selector is moved to Reverse Display (DID)” for further information.
and the system has detected a faulted condition, the
If #PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS#
Driver Information Display (DID) will display a
or #PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SEN#PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS#,
SORS# appears in the Driver Information Display (DID)
#PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS#
make sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear
or #PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED#
fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and
pop up message for five seconds. After five seconds, a car
3
238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then • Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense®.
cycle the ignition. If the message continues to appear see
an authorized dealer.
• When you turn ParkSense® off, the instrument cluster
If the #PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REwill display “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once
QUIRED# message appears in the DID, see an authorized
you turn ParkSense® off, it remains off until you turn
dealer.
it on again, even if you cycle the ignition.
• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense® is turned off, the instrument
Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap
cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF” for as long as
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
the vehicle is in REVERSE.
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
• ParkSense®, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
ParkSense® System Usage Precautions
Cleaning The ParkSense® System
• Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
• Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow,
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense®
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
system operating properly.
properly. The ParkSense® system might not detect an
NOTE:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239
obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
• Use the ParkSense® switch to turn the ParkSense®
system off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer
hitches, etc. are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the
rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor
problem, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the
instrument cluster.
• ParkSense® should be disabled when the liftgate is in
the open position. An opened liftgate could provide a
false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using ParkSense®.
3
240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense®. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense®, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241
PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever/gear selector is put into REVERSE. The
image will be displayed on the Navigation/Multimedia
radio display screen along with a caution note to “check
entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After
five seconds this note will disappear. The ParkView®
camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear
License plate.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic
grid lines will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after
shifting out of #REVERSE# unless the forward vehicle
speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is
shifted into #PARK# or the ignition is switched to the OFF
position.
NOTE: The ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera has programmable modes of operation that may be selected
through the Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect®
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its
the navigation or audio screen appears again.
projected backup path based on the steering wheel
position. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center
of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a
3
242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
hitch/receiver. #Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle.# The following table
shows the approximate distances for each zone:
Zone
Red
Yellow
Green
Distance to the rear of the vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView® should only
be used as a parking aid. The ParkView® camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243
CAUTION! (Continued)
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView® to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView®.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights
and storage for sunglasses. Universal Garage Door
Opener (HomeLink®), power liftgate and power sunroof
switches may also be included, if equipped.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water,
and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Overhead Console
3
244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To turn the lights off, push the switch a second time. The
Lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light lights also turn on when a door is opened. The lights will
can be turned on by pushing the switch on either side of also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE is
pushed.
the console. These buttons are backlit for night time
visibility.
Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
Front Map/Reading Lights
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245
Courtesy Lights
Sunglasses Bin Door
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pushing the top At the front of the console a compartment is provided for
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, push the lens a the storage of a pair of sunglasses. The storage compartsecond time.
ment access is a “push/push” design. Push the chrome
pad on the door to open. Push the chrome pad on the
door to close.
Courtesy Lights
Sunglasses Bin Door
3
246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink® unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt
battery.
The HomeLink® buttons, located on the overhead console, designate the three different HomeLink® channels.
The HomeLink® indicator is located above the center
button.
HomeLink® Buttons/Overhead Consoles
NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®
NOTE:
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage • Erasing all channels should only be performed when
before you begin programming.
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmis-
sion of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that • If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink®
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
system.
Programming A Rolling Code
To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink® For programming garage door openers that were manubuttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red factured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
indicator flashes.
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
3
248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held
transmitter button.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
(Rolling Code)
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
HomeLink® button twice (holding the button for two 2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
activates, programming is complete.
not release the button.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not acti- 3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programvate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to
ming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining
complete the training.
steps.
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
erase the channels.
before 1995.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
3
250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
3. Push and hold the Homelink® button you want to Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
program while you push and hold the hand-held (Non-Rolling Code)
transmitter button.
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi- follow these steps:
cator light. The Homelink® indicator will flash slowly 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re- 2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
not release the button.
from slow to rapid.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button 3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all
and observe the indicator light.
remaining steps.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pushed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink® button,
while you push and release (“cycle”) your hand-held
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indiseveral seconds of transmission.
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sigfully trained.
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink® 4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
door may open and close while you are programming.
time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling 5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programdoor or gate motor.
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
activate when the HomeLink® button is pushed.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
• To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons,
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
erase the channels.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
3
252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for Using HomeLink®
programming, plug it back in at this time.
To operate, push and release the programmed
HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for the
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate opera(Canadian/Gate Operator)
tor, security system, entry door lock, home/office lightTo reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
ing, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may
follow these steps:
also be used at any time.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
Security
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do in your vehicle.
not release the button.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20
3. Without releasing the button proceed with seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
follow all remaining steps.
erased.
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,
here are some of the most common solutions:
• Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitter.
• Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without
these safety features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515
or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety
information or assistance.
3
254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following visors on the overhead console.
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC
and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
Power Sunroof Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the
Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped
by the power sunroof while operating the power
sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
(Continued)
Opening Sunroof — Express
Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will open automatically from any
position. The sunroof will open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”. During Express
Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch
will stop the sunroof.
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the
3
256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a Pinch Protect Feature
partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
held rearward again.
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
Closing Sunroof — Express
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstrucPress the switch forward and release it within one-half
tion if this occurs. Next, push the switch forward and
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
release to Express Close.
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Close”. During Express NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be
the sunroof.
a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
Venting Sunroof — Express
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
forward again.
Push and release the Vent button within one half second
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
called “Express Vent” and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257
Sunshade Operation
Sunroof Maintenance
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens. the glass panel.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is Ignition Off Operation
open.
NOTE:
Wind Buffeting
• The power sunroof switch can remain active for up to
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
approximately ten minutes after the vehicles ignition is
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
placed to the Off position. Opening either front door
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
will cancel this feature.
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur- • This feature is programmable using the Uconnect®
System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Underrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further informathe rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
tion.
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
3
258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
COMMANDVIEW® SUNROOF WITH POWER
SHADE — IF EQUIPPED
The CommandView® sunroof switch is located to the left
between the sun visors on the overhead console.
The power shade switch is located to the right between
the sun visors on the overhead console.
CommandView® Sunroof And Power Shade Switches
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the
Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped
by the power sunroof while operating the power
sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
(Continued)
Opening Sunroof — Express
Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automatically from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will
open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express
Open”. During Express Open operation, any movement
of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the
3
260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a Opening Power Shade — Express
partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and Push the shade switch rearward and release it within
held rearward again.
one-half second and the shade will open automatically from
any position. The shade will open and stop automatically at
Closing Sunroof — Express
the half-open position. Push the shade switch rearward
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half
again and release it within one-half second and the shade
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
will open automatically to the full-open position. This is
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automaticalled “Express Open”. During Express Open operation, any
cally. This is called “Express Close”. During Express
movement of the shade switch will stop the shade.
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop
Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode
the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
forward again.
To open the shade, push and hold the switch rearward.
The shade will open and stop automatically at the
half-open position. Push and hold the shade switch
rearward again and the shade will open automatically to
the full-open position. Any release of the switch will stop
the movement and the shade will remain in a partially
opened condition until the switch is pushed and held
rearward again.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261
Closing Power Shade — Express
Venting Sunroof — Express
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the shade will close automatically from any
position. If the sunroof is completely closed the shade
will close fully and stop automatically. This is called
“Express Close”. During Express Close operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the shade.
Push and release the #Vent# button within one-half second and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This
is called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
To close the shade, push and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the shade will remain in a partially closed
condition until the switch is pushed and held forward
again.
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, push the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
NOTE: If the sunshade is in the closed position when the
NOTE: If the sunroof is open, the shade will close to the vent switch is pushed, the sunshade will automatically
half-open position. Pushing the shade close button again cycle to the halfway open position prior to the sunroof
will automatically close both the sunroof and shade opening to the Vent position.
completely.
Pinch Protect Feature
Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
3
262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result Ignition Off Operation
in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be
NOTE:
a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.
• The power sunroof switch can remain active for up to
Wind Buffeting
approximately ten minutes after the vehicles ignition is
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
placed to the Off position. Opening either front door
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
will cancel this feature.
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain • This feature is programmable using the Uconnect®
System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Underopen or partially open positions. This is a normal occurstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informarence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
tion.
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small
Sunroof Maintenance
electronics and other low powered electrical accessories.
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean The power outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a
“battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered.
the glass panel.
Power outlets labeled with a “key” are powered when
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263
the ignition is in the ON or ACC position, while the The front power outlet is located inside the storage area
outlets labeled with a “battery” are connected directly to on the center stack of the instrument panel. Push inward
the battery and powered at all times.
on the storage lid to open the compartment and gain
access to this power outlet.
NOTE:
• All accessories connected to the “battery” powered
outlets should be removed or turned off when the
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
discharge.
• To ensure proper cigar lighter operation, a MOPAR®
knob and element must be used.
CAUTION!
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as
this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage
not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Front Power Outlet
3
264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a power The rear power outlet is located in the right rear cargo
outlet located in the storage area of the center console.
area.
Center Console Outlet
Rear Power Outlet
NOTE: The rear power outlet can be switched from
switched “ignition” only to constant “battery” powered
all the time. See your local authorized dealer for details.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265
3
Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter Panel Fuse
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — F104 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet Console Bin
2 — F90–F91 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter Panel
3 — F93 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel
266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the
back of the center console to convert DC current to AC
current. This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and other low power devices requiring power up to
150 Watts. Certain high-end video games, such as Playstation®4 and XBox One will exceed this power limit, as
will most new computers and power tools.
3
Power Inverter
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,
the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once
the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. To avoid overloading
268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
the circuit, check the power ratings on electrical devices CUPHOLDERS
prior to using the inverter.
There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers
located in the center console.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Front Cupholders
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269
There are two cupholders for the rear seat passengers STORAGE
located in the fold-down center armrest.
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the right side of the
instrument panel.
Rear Cupholders
Glove Compartment
3
270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To open the glove compartment, pull outward on the Door Storage
latch and lower the glove compartment door.
Large storage areas are built into the door panels for easy
access.
Opened Glove Compartment
Door Panel Storage
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271
To open the upper storage compartment, pull upward on
The center console contains both an upper and a lower the small latch located on the lid.
storage area.
Console Features
3
Storage Compartment Latches
Storage Compartment
272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lift upward on the larger of the latches to access the
lower storage compartment.
Lower Storage Compartment CD/DVD Player — If
Equipped
Lower Storage Compartment
Your vehicle may have an optional CD or DVD player
located in the center console.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Driving with the
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273
WARNING! (Continued)
console compartment lid open may result in injury in
a collision.
3
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Rechargeable Flashlight
The rechargeable flashlight is mounted on the left side of
the cargo area. The flashlight snaps out of the bezel when
needed. The flashlight features two bright LED light
bulbs and is powered by rechargeable lithium batteries
that recharge when snapped back into place.
Push in on the flashlight to release it.
Push And Release
274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To operate the flashlight, push the switch once for high, NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a rear subwoofer, the passenger side cargo area will not be availtwice for low, and a third time to return to off.
able.
Three-Push Switch
Cargo Storage Bins
There are up to four removable storage bins located in the
rear cargo area. There are two storage bins located on
either side of the cargo area.
Rear Storage Bin
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275
Two additional storage bins are located under the load
floor. To access the lower storage bins, raise the load floor
and attach the tether hook (attached to the bottom of the
load floor) to the liftgate opening.
3
Lower Storage Bins
Tether Strap
276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped
NOTE: The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to
secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or
protect passengers from loose cargo.
To cover the cargo area:
1. Grasp the cover at the center handle. Pull it over the
cargo area.
2. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots in
the pillar trim cover.
3. The liftgate may be opened with the cargo cover in
place.
Rear Cargo Cover
WARNING!
In a collision, a loose cargo cover in the vehicle could
cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden stop and
strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store the cargo
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277
WARNING! (Continued)
cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compartment. Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken
from its mounting. Do not store it in the vehicle.
3
Rear Cargo Tie-Downs
The rear cargo tie-downs, located on the cargo area floor,
should be used to safely secure loads when the vehicle is
moving.
Rear Cargo Tie-Downs
278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats
and use seat belts.
• Cargo tie-down hooks are not safe anchors for a
child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident,
a hook could pull loose and allow the child seat to
come loose. A child could be badly injured. Use
only the anchors provided for child seat tethers.
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your
vehicle:
• Do not carry loads which exceed the load limits
described on the label attached to the left door or
left door center pillar.
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of
the vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
accident.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the multifunction lever on the left side of the steering column.
The rear wiper/washer is operated by rotating a switch,
located at the middle of the lever.
3
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to
the first detent for intermittent operation and to
the second detent for continuous rear wiper operation.
Rotating the center portion upward once more
will activate the washer pump which will continue to operate as long as the switch is held. Upon
280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
release of the switch, the wipers will resume the continuous rear wiper operation. When this rotary control is in
the OFF position, rotating it downward will activate the
rear washer pump which will continue to operate as long
as the switch is held. Once the switch is released it will
return to the OFF position and the wipers will cycle
several times before returning to the parked position.
NOTE: As a protective measure, the pump will stop if the
switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the switch
is released the pump will resume normal operation.
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned
OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the “park”
position.
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on
the climate control panel. Push this button to turn
on the rear window defroster and the heated outside
mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will
illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The
rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of
operation, push the button a second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
To move the crossbars, loosen the attachments, located at
the upper edge of each crossbar, approximately eight turns
using the anti-theft wrench provided with the MOPAR®
crossbars. Then, move the crossbar to the desired position,
keeping the crossbars parallel to the rack frame. Once the
crossbar is in the desired position, retighten the with the
wrench to lock the crossbar into position.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the NOTE:
weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The • To help control wind noise when the crossbars are not
load must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be
in use, place the front and rear crossbars approxiuniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
mately 24 in (61 cm) apart. Optimal noise reduction
can then be achieved by adjusting the front crossbar
NOTE: If not equipped with crossbars, your authorized
forward or aft using increments of 1 in (2.5 cm).
dealer can order and install MOPAR® crossbars built
specifically for this roof rack system.
• If (or any metallic object) is placed over the satellite
Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars.
radio antenna (if equipped), you may experience inThe roof rack does not increase the total load carrying
terruption of satellite radio reception. For improved
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo
satellite radio reception, avoid placing the rear crossinside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not
bar over the satellite radio antenna.
exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
3
282 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, do
not carry any loads on the roof rack without the
crossbars installed. The load should be secured and
placed on top of the crossbars, not directly on the
roof. If it is necessary to place the load on the roof,
place a blanket or some other protection between
the load and the roof surface.
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not
exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150 lb
(68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as
possible and secure the load appropriately.
• Long loads which extend over the windshield, such
as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large
frontal area should be secured to both the front and
rear of the vehicle.
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof
rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby
truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to a load.
This is especially true on large flat loads and may
result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
! INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .286
▫ DID Green Telltales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
! INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
▫ DID Selectable Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
! INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .288
▫ Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items . . . . . . . .313
! DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID). . . . . .297 ! Uconnect® SETTINGS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
▫ DID Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
▫ Buttons On The Faceplate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
▫ Engine Oil Life Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen. . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
▫ DID Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect® 5.0 Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . .316
▫ DID White Telltales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
▫ DID Amber Telltales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
▫ DID Red Telltales. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect® 8.4 Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . .332
4
284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
! Uconnect® RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .352
▫ Replacing The Remote Control Batteries. . . . . .363
! iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . .352
▫ Headphones Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
! Uconnect® REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT (RSE)
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
▫ Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
▫ Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
▫ Dual Video Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
▫ Replacing The Headphone Batteries. . . . . . . . .366
▫ Unwired® Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
▫ Blu-ray™ Disc Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356 ! STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Play Video Games . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Play A DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc Using The
Touchscreen Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Important Notes For Dual Video Screen
!
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
!
▫ Blu-ray™ Disc Player Remote Control — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
!
IF
. . . .373
. . . .374
. . . .374
CD/DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc MAINTENANCE . . . .374
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .375
▫ Regulatory And Safety Information . . . . . . . . .375
CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285
▫ General Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
▫ Voice Text Reply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
▫ Climate Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
▫ Climate (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . .385
▫ Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387
▫ Uconnect® Access* (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . .401
! Uconnect® VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
▫ Register (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
▫ Introducing Uconnect® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
▫ Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
▫ Basic Voice Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
▫ Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
▫ Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
▫ Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
▫ Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
▫ Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
▫ Yelp® (8.4A/8.4AN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
▫ SiriusXM Travel Link™ (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . .406
▫ Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
4
286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1
2
3
4
5
— Air Outlet
— Instrument Cluster
— Radio
— Glove Compartment
— Climate Controls
6 — Lower Switch Bank
11 — Hood Release
7 — Hazard Switch
12 — Fuel Door Release
8 — Storage Bin (SD Card, AUX, USB Media Hub) 13 — Headlight Switch
9 — ESC Button
14 — Dimmer Control
10 — Ignition Switch
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
4
288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
2. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to the
ON/RUN position, this light will turn on for four
to eight seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb
check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will
sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver
or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat
Belt Indicator Light will flash or remain on continuously.
Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
3. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
4. High Beam Indicator
Indicates that headlights are on high beam.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289
5. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
8. Speedometer
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog Indicates vehicle speed.
lights are on.
9. Upper Right Selectable DID
6. Upper Left Selectable DID
This area of the cluster will display selectable informaThis area of the cluster will display selectable informa- tion such as compass, outside temperature, etc. For
tion such as compass, outside temperature, etc. For further information, refer to “Driver Information Display
further information, refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)” in this section.
(DID)” in this section.
10. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
7. Turn Signal Indicator
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
The arrows will flash with the exterior turn
an onboard diagnostic system called OBD II that
signals when the turn signal lever is operated.
monitors engine and automatic transmission conA tone will chime, and a DID message will trol systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in
appear if either turn signal is left on for more the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb
than 1 mile (1.6 km).
does not come on when turning the key from OFF to
ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
NOTE: If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check
Certain conditions, poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate
for a defective outside light bulb.
the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced
4
290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
if the light stays on through several of your typical
driving cycles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive
normally and will not require towing.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
11. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291
CAUTION!
WARNING! (Continued)
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,
turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service.
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
(Continued)
12. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
4
292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has (ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
dropped below a specified level.
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi- Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for apthe brake fluid level checked.
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necesunless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
sary.
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi- determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tion.
tires.)
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application. equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
13. Fuel Gauge/Fuel Door Reminder
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the vehicle Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumiwhere the fuel door is located. The pointer shows the nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
the ON/RUN position.
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
14. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
should be checked monthly when cold and
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the low tire pressure telltale.
4
294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295
When the appropriate conditions exist, this Driver Information Display (DID) messages. Refer to “Driver InforThe odometer display shows the total distance the vemation Display” in this section.
hicle has been driven.
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of 16. Selectable DID Menu
15. Driver Information Display (DID)
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your
odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair
technician should leave the odometer reading the same
as it was before the repair or service. If she/he cannot do
so, then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker
must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage
was before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you
to make a record of the odometer reading before the
repair/service, so that you can be sure that it is properly
reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the
odometer must be reset at zero.
This area of the cluster will display the DID selectable
menu. For further information, refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)” in this section.
17. Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned to the ON/RUN position. If the light is
either not on during starting, stays on, or turns
on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant
Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
4
296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
18. Vehicle Security Light
This light will flash rapidly for approximately
15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is
arming. The light will flash at a slower speed
continuously after the alarm is set. The security
light will also come on for about three seconds when the
ignition is first turned on.
19. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
20. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON/RUN position. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on
momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned
to ON/RUN.
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the
ESC system will be ON, even if it was turned off
previously.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESC activation.
21. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped
4
This indicator will illuminate when the park
lights or headlights are turned on.
DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID)
The Driver Information Display (DID) features a driverDriver Information Display (DID) Location
interactive display that is located in the instrument
The
DID
Menu items consists of the following:
cluster.
• Digital Speedometer
• Vehicle Info
• Terrain — If Equipped
298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Driver Assist — If Equipped
• Fuel Economy
• Trip
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
• Audio
• Stored Messages
• Screen Setup
• Speed Warning — If Equipped
• Diagnostics — If Equipped
DID Buttons
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299
• UP Arrow Button
• OK Button
Push and release the UP arrow button to scroll The OK button may be used for the following:
upward through the main menu and submenus. Selection
Reset (hold)
Clearing (hold)
• DOWN Arrow Button
Push and release the DOWN arrow button to DID Displays
scroll downward through the main menu and The DID displays are located in the center portion of the
submenus.
cluster and consist of multiple sections:
• RIGHT Arrow Button
1. Main Screen — The inner ring of the display will
Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to
access the information screens or submenu
screens of a main menu item.
illuminate in grey under normal conditions, yellow for
non critical warnings, red for critical warnings, and
white for on demand information.
2. Audio Information and Sub-menu Information —
Whenever there are submenus available, the position
Push and release the LEFT arrow button to
within the submenus is shown here.
access the information screens or submenu
3. Reconfigurable Telltales/Information
screens of a main menu item.
• BACK/LEFT Arrow Button
4
300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. Telltales/Indicators
5. Gear Selector Status (PRNDL)
that consist of approximately 60 possible warning or information messages. These pop up messages fall into several
categories:
6. Selectable Information (Compass, Temp, Range to • Five Second Stored Messages
Empty, Trip A, Trip B, Average Fuel Economy, Current
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
Fuel Economy)
message takes control of the main display area for five
7. Air Suspension Status — If Equipped
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most of
the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the
8. 4WD Status — Status
condition that activated it remains active) and can be
9. Selectable Gauge 1
reviewed from the “Messages” main menu item. ExThe main display area will normally display the main amples of this message type are “Right Front Turn Signal
menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main menu. Lamp Out” and “Low Tire Pressure.”
The main display area also displays “pop up” messages • Unstored Messages
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the
condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples
of this message type are “Turn Signal On” (if a turn signal
is left on) and “Lights On” (if driver leaves the vehicle).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301
chime has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil
change interval. The engine oil change indicator system
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start
is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change
feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition
interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal
is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are
driving style.
“Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar” and “Press Brake
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
Pedal and Push Button to Start.”
time you cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. To
• Five Second Unstored Messages
turn off the message temporarily, push and release the
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of OK button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
message takes control of the main display area for five performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. An following procedure.
example of this message type is “Automatic High Beams Oil Change Reset Procedure
On.”
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push and release the
Engine Oil Life Reset
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the ignition
Oil Change Required
to the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
• Unstored Messages Until RUN
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change 2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
within 10 seconds.
will display in the DID for five seconds after a single
4
302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push and release the • Oil Change Due
ENGINE START/STOP button once to return the
• Fuel Low
ignition to the OFF/LOCK position.
• Service Antilock Brake System
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not • Service Electronic Throttle Control
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
• Service Power Steering
DID Messages
• Cruise Off
• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
• Cruise Ready
• Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled
• ACC Override
• Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Cruise Set To XXX MPH
• Service Air Bag System
• Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) “Inflate Tire to
• Traction Control Off
XX”
• Washer Fluid Low
• Oil Pressure Low
• Service Tire Pressure System
• Speed Warning Set
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303
• Speed Warning Exceeded
• Key in Ignition Lights On
• Brake Fluid Low
• Remote Start Active Push Start Button
• Parking Brake Engaged
• Service Electronic Braking System
• Engine Temperature Hot
• Battery Voltage Low
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
• Lights On
• Right Turn Signal Light Out
• Left Turn Signal Light Out
• IGN OR ACC
• Vehicle Not In Park
• IGN OR ACC KEYLESS GO
• Remote Start Active Key to Run
• Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low
• Remote Start Aborted Too Cold
• Remote Start Aborted Door Open
• Remote Start Aborted Hood Open
• Remote Start Aborted Tailgate Open
• Remote Start Aborted Time Expired
• Remote Start Disabled Start To Reset
• Service Airbag System
• Service Airbag Warning Light
• Door Open
4
304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Doors Open
• Engage Park Brake To Prevent Rolling
• Gear Not Available
• Washer Fluid Low
• Liftgate Open
• Shift Not Allowed
• Vehicle Speed To High To Shift
• Shift to Neutral then Drive or Reverse
• Autostick Unavailable Service Required
• Automatic Unavailable Use Autostick Service Req.
• Transmission Getting Hot Press Brake
• Trans. Hot Stop Safely Shift To Park Wait to Cool
• Transmission Cool Ready to Drive
• Service Transmission
• Service Shifter
• Transmission Too Cold Idle With Engine On
• Service Air Suspension System
• Normal Ride Height Achieved
• Aerodynamic Ride Height Achieved
• Off Road 1 Ride Height Achieved
• Off Road 2 Ride Height Achieved
• Entry/Exit Ride Height Achieved
• Selected Ride Height Not Permitted
• Service Air Suspension System Immediately
• Reduce Speed To Maintain Selected Ride Height
• Air Suspension System Cooling Down Please Wait
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305
• Vehicle Cannot Be Lowered Door Open
• Off Road 2 Watch For Clearance
• Entry/Exit Watch For Clearance
• Air Suspension Temporarily Disabled For Jacking And
Tire Change
• Battery Low Start Engine To Change Ride Height
DID White Telltales
This area will show reconfigurable white caution telltales. These telltales include:
• Cruise Ready
This telltale will turn on to indicate that the
Adaptive Cruise Control system is ready to be
activated.
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the • Hill Descent
white telltales area on the right, amber telltales in the
This telltale will turn on to indicate that the Hill
middle, and red telltales on the left.
Descent system is activated.
• Selec — Speed
This telltale will turn on to indicate that the
Selec-Speed is activated.
4
306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Adaptive Cruise Control Ready and Adaptive Cruise • Transmission Temperature Warning Telltale
Control Set
This telltale indicates that the transmission
fluid temperature is running hot. This may
• This telltale will turn on to indicate that the ACC is
occur with severe usage, such as trailer towing.
ready and has been set to the desired speed.
If this telltale turns on, safely pull over and
DID Amber Telltales
stop the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUThis area will show reconfigurable amber caution tell- TRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light
tales. These telltales include:
turns off.
• Low Fuel Telltale
• Service Forward Collision Warming — If Equipped
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal
(11.0 L), this light will turn on and remain on until
fuel is added.
This light warns the driver of a potential collision with the vehicle in front and prompts the
driver to take action in order to avoid the
collision. For further information, refer to
• Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding
This telltale will turn on to indicate the wind- The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
shield washer fluid is low.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307
• Service Adaptive Cruise Control — If Equipped
• Oil Pressure Warning Light
This telltale indicates low engine oil pressure. If
This light will turn on when a ACC is not
operating and needs service. For further infor- the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut
mation, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound
(ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of when this light turns on.
Your Vehicle.”
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
DID Red Telltales
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
This area will show reconfigurable red telltales. These
telltales include:
• Oil Temperature Warning Light
• Door Ajar
This light will turn on to indicate that one or
more doors may be ajar.
This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is
high. If the light turns on while driving, stop
the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as
possible.
• Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. If the light stays on or comes on while
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
4
308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.
vehicle has completely stopped and the gear selector is
placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off.
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies.”
required. You may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may
• Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
require towing.
This light informs you of a problem with the
• Engine Temperature Warning Light
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
light will come on when the ignition is first
This light warns of an overheated engine conditurned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb
tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge apcheck. If the light does not come on during starting, have proaches H, this indicator will illuminate, and a single
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
chime will sound after reaching a set threshold. Further
overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H,
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the
a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed
engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the
to cool.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and DID Green Telltales
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, • Electronic Speed Control SET
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the veThis telltale will illuminate green when the
hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
electronic speed control is SET. For further
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
information, refer to “Electronic Speed Conservice. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
trol” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Do In Emergencies” for more information.
Vehicle.”
• Electric Power Steering Malfunction – If Equipped
DID Selectable Menu Items
This telltale is on when the Electric Power
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow buttons until
Steering is not operating and needs service.
the desired Selectable Menu icon/title is highlighted in
the DID.
• Liftgate Ajar
Speedometer
This light will turn on to indicate that liftgate
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
may be ajar.
the Speedometer menu is displayed in the DID. Push and
release the OK button to toggle units (km/h or mph) of
digital speedometer.
4
310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MPH To km/h
Oil Temperature
Oil Pressure
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button
until the MPH to km/h icon is highlighted in the Oil Life
DID. Push and release the OK button to change Battery Voltage
the display between MPH or km/h.
Terrain — If Equipped
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Vehicle Info icon/title is highlighted in the DID. Push and release the RIGHT
arrow button and Coolant Temp will be displayed. Push and release the LEFT or RIGHT arrow
button to scroll through the information submenus and
push and release the OK button to select or reset the
following resettable submenus:
Tire Pressure
Transmission Temperature
Push and release the UP or DOWN
arrow button until the Terrain display
icon/title is highlighted in the DID.
Push and release the RIGHT or LEFT
arrow button to display the SelecTerrain, Air Suspension, Drivetrain,
and Wheel Articulation.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311
Driver Assist — If Equipped
Trip
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Driver Assist display icon/title
button until the Trip icon/title is highlighted in
is highlighted in the DID. For further informathe DID, then toggle left or right to select Trip
tion, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
A or Trip B.
— If Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
The Trip A and Trip B information will display the
Vehicle.”
following:
Fuel Economy
• Distance mi
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow • Average Fuel Economy
button until the Fuel Economy Menu icon/title • Elapsed Time
is highlighted. Push and hold the OK button to
Hold the OK button to reset all the information.
reset feature.
• Range
• Current MPG or L/100 km
• Average MPG or L/100 km
4
312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
OK button to enter the submenus and follow the prompts
on the screen as needed. The Screen Setup feature allows
you to change what information is displayed in the
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
instrument cluster as well as the location that information
button until the Audio Menu icon/title is highis displayed.
lighted in the DID.
Speed Warning — If Equipped
Stored Messages
Audio
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
the Messages Menu icon/title is highlighted in
button until the Speed Warning Menu icon/
the DID. This feature shows the number of
title is highlighted in the DID. Push and release
stored warning messages. Pushing the RIGHT
OK to enter speed warning. Use UP or DOWN
arrow button will allow you to see what the
arrow
to
select
a desired speed, then push and release OK
stored messages are.
to set the speed. The Manual Speed Assist (MSA) Speed
Screen Setup
Warning telltale will display in the DID, and a chime will
sound with a pop up warning message when the set
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow speed is exceeded.
button until the Screen Setup Menu icon/title
is highlighted in the DID. Push and release the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
Upper Right
Current Gear
• None
• On
• Off
Upper Left
• None
• Compass
• Outside Temp (default setting)
• Time
• Range To Empty (RTE)
• Fuel Economy Average
• Fuel Economy Current
• Trip A
• Trip B
• Compass (default setting)
• Outside Temp
• Time
• Range To Empty (RTE)
• Fuel Economy Average
• Fuel Economy Current
• Trip A
• Trip B
Restore To Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default
Settings)
• Cancel
• Okay
4
314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect® SETTINGS
The Uconnect® system uses a combination of buttons on
the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on
the center of the instrument panel that allow you to
access and change the customer programmable features.
Many features can vary by vehicle.
Uconnect® 5.0 Buttons On Touchscreen And Buttons On
Faceplate
1 — Uconnect® Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect® Buttons On The Faceplate
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315
Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect®
system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition,
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right
side of the Climate Controls in the center of the instrument panel. Turn the control knob to scroll through
menus and change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the
center of the control knob one or more times to select or
change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Your Uconnect® system may also have Screen Off and
Back buttons located below the Uconnect® system.
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Buttons On Faceplate And
Buttons On Touchscreen
1 — Uconnect® Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect® Buttons On The Faceplate
Push the Screen Off button to turn off the Uconnect®
touchscreen. Push the Screen Off button a second time to
turn the touchscreen on.
Push the Back button to exit out of a Menu or certain
option on the Uconnect® system.
4
316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
mode, press and release the preferred setting and make
your selection. Once the setting is complete, either press
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
the Back Arrow/Done button on the touchscreen or the
Uconnect® display.
Back button on the faceplate to return to the previous
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect®
menu or press the “X” button on the touchscreen to close
5.0 Personal Settings
out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down
Push the MORE button on the faceplate to display the Arrow buttons on the right side of the screen will allow
menu setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect® system you to toggle up or down through the available settings.
allows you to access programmable features that may be NOTE: All settings should be changed with the ignition
equipped such as Display, Voice, Clock & Date, Safety & in the “Run” position.
Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort,
Engine Off Options, Suspension, Compass Settings, Au- Display
dio, Phone/Bluetooth®, Sirius Setup, Restore Settings, After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen
and Clear Personal Data.
the following settings will be available.
Buttons On The Touchscreen
NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a • Display Mode
time.
When in this display you may select the “Auto” or
When making a selection, press the button on the touch- “Manual” display settings. To change Mode status, press
screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
and release the “Auto” or “Manual” button on the touch- • Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
screen. Then press the arrow back button on the touchscreen.
When in this display, you may select the overall screen
NOTE: When Day or Night is selected for the Display brightness with the headlights off. Adjust the brightness
Mode, the usage of the Parade Mode feature will cause with the “+” and “–” setting buttons on the touchscreen
the radio to activate the Display Brightness Day control or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+”
even though the headlights are on.
and “–” buttons on the touchscreen. Then press the arrow
back button on the touchscreen.
• Display Brightness With Headlights ON
NOTE: To make changes to the #Display Brightness with
When in this display, you may select the overall screen
Headlights
OFF# setting, the headlights must be off and
brightness with the headlights on. Adjust the brightness
the interior dimmer switch must not be in the #party# or
with the “+” and “–” setting buttons on the touchscreen
or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” #parade# positions.
and “–” buttons on the touchscreen. Then press the arrow • Set Language
back button on the touchscreen.
When in this display, you may select one of multiple
NOTE: To make changes to the #Display Brightness with languages (English/Français/Español) for all display noHeadlights ON# setting, the headlights must be on and menclature, including the trip functions and the navigathe interior dimmer switch must not be in the #party# or tion system (if equipped). Press the “Set Language”
#parade# positions.
4
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
button on the touchscreen, then press the desired lan- Voice
guage button on the touchscreen. Press the back arrow After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen the
button on the touchscreen to return to the previous following settings will be available:
menu.
• Voice Response Length
• Units
When in this display, you may change the Voice ReWhen in this display, you may select to have the DID, sponse Length settings. To change the Voice Response
odometer, and navigation system (if equipped) changed Length, press the “Voice Response Length” button on the
between US and Metric units of measure. Press “US” or touchscreen and select from “Brief” or “Detailed.” Press
“Metric” to make your selection. Press the back arrow the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
button on the touchscreen to return to the previous previous menu.
menu.
• Show Command List
• Touchscreen Beep
When in this display, you may change the Show ComWhen in this display, you may turn on or shut off the mand List settings. To change the Show Command List
sound heard when a button on the touchscreen is settings, press the “Show Command List” button on the
pressed. Press the “Touchscreen Beep” button on the touchscreen and select from “Always,” “With Help” or
touchscreen then select from “on” or “off.” Press the back “Never.” Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous to return to the previous menu.
menu.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
Clock & Date
Safety/Assistance
After pressing the “Clock & Date” button on the touch- After pressing the “Safety/Assistance” button on the
screen the following settings will be available:
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Set Time
When in this display, you may set the time and format
manually. Press the “Set Time” button then choose from
a “12 hour” or “24 hour format.” Press the corresponding
arrow above and below the current time to adjust, then
select “AM” or “PM.” Press the back arrow button on the
touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
• ParkSense®
The ParkSense® system will scan for objects behind the
vehicle when the transmission shift lever/gear selector is
in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18
km/h). It will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to
indicate the proximity to other objects. The system can be
enabled with Sound Only, or Sound and Display. To
change the ParkSense® status, press and release the
• Set Date
“Sound Only” or “Sounds and Display” button. Then
When in this display, you may set the date manually. press the back arrow button on the touchscreen. Refer to
Press the “Set Date” button then press the corresponding “ParkSense®” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
arrows above and below the current date to adjust. Press Vehicle” for system function and operating information.
the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu.
4
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Tilt Mirrors In Reverse
When this feature is selected, the exterior sideview
mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the
RUN position and the transmission shift lever/gear
selector is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors will
move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE. To make your selection,
press the “Tilt Mirrors In Reverse” button on the touchscreen and make your selection. Press the back arrow
button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu.
entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After
five seconds, this note will disappear. To make your
selection, press the “ParkView® Backup Camera Active
Guidelines” button on the touchscreen and make your
selection. Press arrow button on the touchscreen to return
to the previous menu.
• ParkView® Backup Camera Delay
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and
the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the
vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay
• ParkView® Backup Camera Active Guidelines
turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines
will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
“REVERSE” unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds
Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see
8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK
active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera
or the ignition is switched to the OFF position. To set the
display whenever the shift lever/gear selector is put into
REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the radio
touchscreen display along with a caution note to “check
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
ParkView® Backup Camera Delay push the MORE button on the faceplate, the “settings” button on the touchscreen, then the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button on
the touchscreen. Press the “Parkview Backup camera
Delay” button on the touchscreen to turn the ParkView®
Delay ON or OFF.
• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
When this feature is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
on the windshield. To make your selection, press the
“Rain Sensing” button on the touchscreen and make your
selection. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu.
• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
the “Hill Start Assist” button on the touchscreen and
make your selection. Press the back arrow button on the
touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available.
• Headlights Off Delay
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of
the amount of time the headlights remain on after the
engine is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay
setting, press the “Headlight Off Delay” button on the
touchscreen, and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90
seconds. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu.
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA) • Headlight Illumination On Approach
system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of
and operating information. To make your selection, press the amount of time the headlights remain on after the
4
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,
press the “Illuminated Approach” button and choose
either 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90 seconds. Press the back
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu.
• Auto High Beams — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will activate/deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To make your selection, press the “Auto High
Beams” button on the touchscreen and make your selection. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to
• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
return to the previous menu. Refer to “Automatic High
Beam Headlamp Control — If Equipped” in “UnderWhen this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on ap- standing The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further inforproximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. mation.
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are • Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
your selection, press the “Lights w/Wipers” button on
whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,
the touchscreen and make your selection. Press the back
press the “Daytime Running Lights” button on the toucharrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
screen and make your selection. Press the back arrow
menu.
button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
• Flash Lights w/Lock
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the Passive Entry
Feature. To make your selection, press the “Flash Lights
w/Lock” button on the touchscreen and select from “On”
or “Off.” Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu.
• Auto Unlock On Exit
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
opened. To make your selection, press the “Auto Unlock
On Exit” button on the touchscreen and select from “On”
or “Off.” Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu.
Doors & Locks
• Flash Lights w/Lock
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touch- When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
screen the following settings will be available.
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
• Auto Door Locks
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the Passive Entry
Feature. To make your selection, press the “Flash Lights
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock autow/Lock” button on the touchscreen and select from “On”
matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph
or “Off.” Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
(24 km/h). To make your selection, press the “Auto Door
to return to the previous menu.
Locks” button on the touchscreen and select from “On”
or “Off.” Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu.
4
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
doors unlock with the first push of the Key Fob. Select
“Driver” to have the only the driver door open with the
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
first push of the key fob.
the Key Fob Lock button is pressed. To make your
selection, press the “Sound Horn With Lock” button on NOTE: Passive Entry — If Equipped. If “All” is selected,
the touchscreen and select from “Off,” ”1st Press,” or all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry door
“2nd Press.” Press the back arrow button on the touch- handle is grasped. If “Driver” is selected, only the
screen to return to the previous menu.
driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is
grasped.
• Horn w/Remote Start — If Equipped
• Passive Entry
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection, This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
press the “Horn w/Remote Start” button on the touch- door(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless
screen and select from “On” or “Off.” Press the back Entry (RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. To make
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous your selection, press the “Passive Entry” button on the
menu.
touchscreen and select from “On” or “Off. Press the back
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
• Remote Door Unlock
menu. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things To
When “Remote Door Unlock” is selected, you may Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further informachoose from “Driver” or “All.” Select “All” to have all tion.
• Horn w/Lock
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
• Memory Linked to Fob — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, press the “Memory
Linked to Fob” button on the touchscreen and select from
“On” or “Off.” Press the back arrow button on the
touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location if “Memory Linked to Fob” is set to (ON) when
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is used to
unlock the door. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
select from “On” or “Off.” Press the back arrow button on
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start”
button on the touchscreen the following settings will be
available:
• Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and
heated steering wheel will automatically turn ON when
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will
turn ON. To make your selection, press the “Auto Heated
• Power Lift Gate Alert — If Equipped
Seats” button on the touchscreen, then select either “Off,”
This feature plays an alert when the power lift gate is “Remote Start” or “All Starts.” Press the back arrow
raising or lowering. To make your selection, press the button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
“Power Lift Gate Alert” button on the touchscreen and menu.
4
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Engine Off Options
• Engine Off Power Delay
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the When this feature is selected, the power window
touchscreen the following settings will be available.
switches, radio, Uconnect® phone system (if equipped),
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
• Easy Exit Seats — If Equipped
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
When this feature is selected, the Driver’s seat will 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
automatically move rearward once the engine is shut off. either front door will cancel this feature. Press the “EnTo make your selection, press the “Easy Exit Seats” gine Off Power Delay” button on the touchscreen and
button on the touchscreen and make your selection. Press choose from “0 sec,” “45 sec,” “5 min” or “10 min” to
the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the select your desired time interval. Then press the arrow
previous menu.
back button on the touchscreen.
• Headlight Off Delay
• Auto Entry/Exit — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. Press the “Headlight Off Delay”
button on the touchscreen and choose from “0,” “30,”
“60,” or “90” seconds to select your desired time interval.
Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return
to the previous menu.
When this feature is selected, it automatically lowers the
vehicle ride height position when shifted into park. Press
the “Auto Entry/Exit” button on the touchscreen and
choose from “On” or “Off.” Press the back arrow button
on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
Suspension — If Equipped
• Tire Jack Mode
After pressing the “Suspension” button on the touch- When this feature is selected the air suspension system is
screen the following settings will be available:
disabled to prevent auto leveling of the suspension, while
the vehicle is on a jack changing a tire. To make your
• Auto Entry/Exit Suspension
selection, press the “Tire Jack Mode” button on the
When this feature is selected, the vehicle automatically touchscreen, select “On” or “Off” followed by pressing
lowers from ride height position when vehicle shifted to the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
park for easy entry/exit. To make your selection, press
the “Auto Entry/Exit” button on the touchscreen, select • Transport Mode
“On” or “Off” followed by pressing the back arrow When this feature is selected the air suspension system is
button on the touchscreen.
disabled to assist with flat bed towing. To make your
selection, press the “Transport Mode” button on the
• Display Suspension Messages
touchscreen, select “On” or “Off” followed by pressing
When “All” is selected, all the Air Suspension Alerts will the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
be displayed. When “Warning Only” is selected only the
• Wheel Alignment Mode
Air Suspension Warnings will be displayed.
This feature prevents auto leveling of the air suspension
while performing a wheel alignment service. Before
4
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
performing a wheel alignment this mode must be en- NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the
abled. Refer to your authorized dealer for further infor- instrument panel, such as Mobile Phones, Laptops and
Radar Detectors. This is where the compass module is
mation.
located, and it can cause interference with the compass
Compass Settings — If Equipped
sensor, and it may give false readings.
After pressing the “Compass Settings” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences, and provide the most accurate compass
heading.
Compass Variance Map
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen. Press the back arrow/Done button on the
Press the “Calibration” button on the touchscreen to
touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
change this setting. This compass is self-calibrating,
which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass. • Balance/Fade
When the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade
until it is calibrated. You may also calibrate the compass settings. Press and drag the speaker icon or use the
by pressing the “ON” button on the touchscreen and arrows to adjust, tap the “C” icon to readjust to the center.
completing one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to
from large metal or metallic objects). The compass will return to the previous menu.
now function normally.
• Speed Adjusted Volume
Audio
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
following settings will be available:
press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button on the touch• Equalizer
screen and select from “Off,” “1,” “2” or “3” buttons on
When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and the touchscreen. Press the back arrow/Done button on
Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–” the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
• Perform Compass Calibration
buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on
4
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.” Press the back
arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
previous menu.
To make your selection, press the “Surround Sound”
button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.” Press the Phone/Bluetooth®
back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the
the previous menu.
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Surround Sound — If Equipped
• AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level
for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
To make your selection, press the “AUX Volume Offset”
button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.” Press the
back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to
the previous menu.
• Loudness — If Equipped
• Paired Devices
This feature shows which phones are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer
to your Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
This feature improves sound quality at lower volumes. • Channel Skip
To make your selection, press the “Loudness” button on SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
undesirable channels while scanning. To make your selec- NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription
tion, press the “Channel Skip” button on the touchscreen, and is available for U.S. residents only.
select the channels you would like to skip followed by
pressing the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
Restore Settings
• Subscription Information
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free touchscreen the following settings will be available:
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio • Restore Settings
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
services, it will be necessary to access the information on When this feature is selected it will reset the Display,
Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings.
the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
To restore the settings to their default setting, press the
Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen Restore Settings button. A pop-up will appear asking
to access the Subscription Information screen.
#Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?”
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To select “Yes” to restore, or “Cancel” to exit. Once the
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on settings are restored, a pop up appears stating #settings
reset to default.# Press the back arrow button on the
the screen or visit the provider online.
touchscreen to exit.
4
332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Clear Personal Data
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect®
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button 8.4 Personal Settings
on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail- Press the “Apps” or the “Controls” button on the touchscreen, then press the “Settings” button on the touchable:
screen to display the menu setting screen. In this mode
• Clear Personal Data
the Uconnect® system allows you to access programWhen this feature is selected it will remove personal data mable features that may be equipped such as Display,
including Bluetooth® devices and presets. To remove Voice, Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors
personal information, press the “Clear Personal Data” & Locks, Auto-On Comfort, Engine Off Options, Suspenbutton and a pop-up will appear asking #Are you sure sion, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth®, SiriusXM Setup, Restore
you want to clear all personal data?” select “Yes” to Clear, Settings, Clear Personal Data, and System Information.
or “Cancel” to exit. Once the data has been cleared, a pop
up appears stating #Personal data cleared”. Press the back NOTE: Only one category may be selected at a time.
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous To adjust the setting of a programmable feature, press the
menu.
desired setting option. Once in the desired setting option,
press and release the preferred setting until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has
been selected.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
Once the setting is complete, press the Back Arrow
button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu
or press the X button on the touchscreen to close out of
the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow
button on the right side of the screen will allow you to
toggle up or down through the list of available settings.
NOTE: When Day or Night is selected for the Display
Mode, the usage of the Parade Mode feature will cause
the radio to activate the Display Brightness Day control
even though the headlights are on.
• Display Brightness With Headlights ON
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
the headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the “+” and
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen “–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any
the following settings will be available.
point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen. Then press the arrow back button on the
• Display Mode
touchscreen.
When in this display you may select one of the auto
display settings. To change Mode status, select from NOTE: To make changes to the #Display Brightness with
“Day,” “Night” or “Auto” until a check-mark appears Headlights ON# setting, the headlights must be on and
next to the setting, showing that setting has been se- the interior dimmer switch must not be in the #party# or
lected. Then press the arrow back button on the touch- #parade# positions.
screen.
Display
4
334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
the headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the “+” and
“–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any
point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen. Then press the arrow back button on the
touchscreen.
• Set Language
When in this display, you may select one of multiple
languages (English / Français / Español) for all display
nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the “Set Language”
button on the touchscreen, then select the desired language button on the touchscreen. Press the back arrow
button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
NOTE: To make changes to the #Display Brightness with
menu.
Headlights OFF# setting, the headlights must be off and
the interior dimmer switch must not be in the #party# or • Units
#parade# positions.
When in this display, you may select to have the DID,
odometer, and navigation system (if equipped) changed
between US and Metric units of measure. Press “US” or
This feature will allow you to choose a background
“Metric” until a check-mark appears next to the setting,
theme for the display screen. The theme will change the
showing that setting has been selected. Press the back
background color, highlight color, and button color of the
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
display screen.
menu.
• Set Theme
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335
the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the sound the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
heard when button on the touchscreen is pressed. Press the previous menu.
“Touchscreen Beep” button on the touchscreen until a Voice
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
• Voice Response Length
• Controls Screen Time-Out
• Touchscreen Beep
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
ability for the controls screen to time out. Press the “Controls Screen Time-Out” button on the touchscreen until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
• Navigation Turn-By-Turn Displayed In Cluster — If
Equipped
When this feature is selected, To make your selection, press
the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn Displayed In Cluster” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
When in this display, you may change the Voice Response Length settings. To change the Voice Response
Length, press the “Brief” or “Detailed” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu.
• Show Command List
When in this display, you may choose to Always, With
Help, or Never display the Teleprompter with possible
4
336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
options while in a voice session. To change the Show
Command List settings, press the “Always,” “With
Help,” or “Never” button on the touchscreen until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
Clock
• Set Time Hours
This feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The “Sync
time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be
unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–”
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the hours up or
down. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to
return to the previous menu.
After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen the • Set Time Minutes
following settings will be available:
This feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The
• Sync Time With GPS
“Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be
This feature will allow the radio to sync time with a GPS unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–”
signal. To change the Sync Time setting, press the “Sync buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the minutes up or
time with GPS” button on the touchscreen until a check- down. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to
mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has return to the previous menu.
been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337
• Time Format
This feature will allow you to select the time format
display setting. Press the “Time Format” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the
“12hrs” or “24hrs” setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu.
• Show Time In Status Bar — If Equipped
This feature will allow you to turn on or shut off the
digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time
Status setting press the “Show Time in Status Bar” button
on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting has been selected. Press
the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu.
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button on
the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature provides an
audible and/or visual warning to potential forward collisions. The feature can be can be set to Far, or set to Near.
The default status of FCW is the Far setting. This means the
system will warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you when you are farther away. This
gives you the most reaction time. To change the setting for
more dynamic driving, select the Near setting. This warns
you of a possible collision when you are much closer to the
vehicle in front of you. To change the FCW status, press
and release the “Near” or “Far” button. Then press the back
arrow button on the touchscreen.
4
338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Con- • ParkSense®
trol (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
The ParkSense® system will scan for objects behind the
Vehicle”.
vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE
• Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Active Braking — and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). It
If Equipped
will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate
The FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled
with Sound Only, or Sound and Display. To change the
When this feature is selected, the ABA applies additional
ParkSense® status, press and release the “Sound” or
brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient
brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. The “Sound and Display” button. Then press the back arrow
ABA system becomes active at 5 mph (8 km/h). To make button on the touchscreen. Refer to “ParkSense®” in
your selection, press the “Forward Collision Warning “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function and operating information.
(FCW) with Mitigation - Active Braking” button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, • Front ParkSense® Chime Volume
indicating that the setting had been selected. Press the
The Front ParkSense® Chime Volume settings can be
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
selected from the Driver Information Display (DID) or
previous menu. For further information, refer to “ForUconnect® System — if equipped. The chime volume
ward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation” in “Unsettings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. The factory
derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339
default volume setting is MEDIUM. To make your selection, press the “ParkSense® Front Chime Volume” button
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.
Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return
to the previous menu. ParkSense® will retain its last
known configuration state through ignition cycles.
• Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse
When this feature is selected, the exterior side view
mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the
RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the
REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their
previous position when the transmission is shifted out of
REVERSE. To make your selection, press the “Tilt Side
• Rear ParkSense® Chime Volume
Mirrors In Reverse” button on the touchscreen, until a
The Rear ParkSense® Chime Volume settings can be se- check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the
lected from the DID or Uconnect® System — if equipped. setting had been selected. Press the back arrow button on
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM. To • Blind Spot Alert
make your selection, press the “ParkSense® Rear Chime
Volume” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature
appears next to setting, indicating that the setting had been Provides alerts, visual and/or audible, to indicate objects
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to in your blind spot. The Blind Spot Alert feature can be
return to the previous menu. ParkSense® will retain its last activated in “Lights” mode. When this mode is selected,
the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and
known configuration state through ignition cycles.
will only show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors.
4
340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When “Lights & Chime” mode is activated, the Blind
Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the
exterior mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn
signal is on. When “Off” is selected, the Blind Spot
Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated. To change the
Blind Spot Alert status, press the “Off,” “Lights” or
“Lights & Chime” button on the touchscreen. Then press
the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
display whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE.
The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen
display along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear. To change the mode status,
press the “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines”
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, indicating that the setting had been
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
to return to the previous menu.
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned. • ParkView® Backup Camera Delay
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and
in the BSM not operating to specification.
the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the
• ParkView® Backup Camera Active Guidelines
vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay
turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of
Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see
“REVERSE” unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds
active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341
8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into
“PARK” or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
To set the ParkView® Backup Camera Delay press the
“Controls” button on the touchscreen, the “settings”
button on the touchscreen, then the “Safety & Driving
Assistance” button on the touchscreen. Press the
“Parkview Backup camera Delay” button on the touchscreen to turn the ParkView® Delay ON or OFF.
• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
When this feature is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
on the windshield. To make your selection, press the
“Rain Sensing” button on the touchscreen, until a checkmark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting
had been selected. Press the back arrow button on the
touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA)
system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function
and operating information. To make your selection, press
the “Hill Start Assist” button on the touchscreen, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the
setting had been selected. Press the back arrow button on
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
Lights
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available.
• Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, it allows adjustment of the
amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine
is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay setting,
press the “+” or “–” button on the touchscreen to select
4
342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
your desired time interval, and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec,
60 sec or 90 seconds. Press the back arrow button on the
touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push the
back button on the faceplate.
• Headlight Illumination On Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,
press the “+” or “–” button on the touchscreen to select
your desired time interval. Press the back arrow button
on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or
push the back button on the faceplate.
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
your selection, press the Headlights With Wipers button
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
• Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will activate/deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To make your selection, press the “Auto High
Beams” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu, or push the back button
• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
on the faceplate. Refer to “Automatic High Beam HeadWhen this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is lamp Control — If Equipped” in “Understanding The
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on ap- Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343
• Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
whenever the vehicle is set in motion. To make your
selection, press the “Daytime Running Lights” button on
the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available.
• Auto Door Locks
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h). To make your selection, press the “Auto Door
Locks” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
• Flash Lights With Lock
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote to return to the previous menu, or push the back button
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be on the faceplate.
selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature
selected. To make your selection, press the “Flash Lights • Auto Unlock On Exit
with Lock” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To
to return to the previous menu, or push the back button make your selection, press the “Auto Unlock on Exit”
on the faceplate.
4
344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, showing that setting has been selected.
Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return
to the previous menu, or push the back button on the
faceplate.
• Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or when using the
passive entry feature. This feature may be selected with
or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To
make your selection, press the “Flash Lights with Lock”
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, indicating that the setting has been
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu.
• Sound Horn With Lock
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when the
door locks are activated. To make your selection, press
either the “Off,” “1st Press,” or “2nd Press” button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow
button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
• Sound Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when the
remote start is activated. To make your selection, press the
“Sound Horn with Remote Start” button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing
that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button
on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
• 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
When #Driver Door# is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks, only the driver’s door will unlock with the first
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345
press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
UNLOCK button. You must press the RKE transmitter
UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.
When #All Doors# is selected for 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks, all doors will unlock on the first press of the
RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.
NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks “All Doors,” all doors will unlock no matter which
Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Press
Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, only
the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is
grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, touching the
handle more than once will only result in the driver’s door
opening. If “Driver Door” is selected, once the driver door
is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used
to unlock all doors (or use RKE transmitter).
• Passive Entry
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles
door(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. To make
your selection, press the “Passive Entry” button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Press the back
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu, or push the back button on the faceplate. Refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle”.
• Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic recall of all settings
stored to a memory location (driver’s seat, exterior
mirrors, steering column position and radio station presets) to enhance driver mobility when entering and
exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press the
“Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob” button on the
4
346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, Auto-On Comfort — If Equipped
showing that setting has been selected. Press the back After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort” button on the
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous touchscreen the following settings will be available:
menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
• Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
to ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat will
is used to unlock the door. Refer to “Driver Memory automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40° F
Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” (4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the
driver vented seat will turn on. To make your selection,
for further information.
press the “Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat &
• Power Lift Gate Chime — If Equipped
Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start” button on the touchThis feature plays an alert when the power lift gate is screen, then select either “Off,” “Remote Start” or “All
raising or lowering. To make your selection, press the Starts” until a check-mark appears next to setting, show“Power Lift Gate Chime” button on the touchscreen, until ing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow/
a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on menu.
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push
the back button on the faceplate.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the Engine Off Power Delay status press the press the “+” or
“-” button to choose from “0 seconds,” “45 seconds,” “5
touchscreen the following settings will be available.
minutes,” or “10 minutes.” Press the back arrow button
• Easy Exit Seat — If Equipped
on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to • Headlight Off Delay
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, press the “Easy Exit When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
Seat” button on the touchscreen until a check-mark have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen Delay status press the “+” or “-” button on the touchscreen to select your desired time interval. Press the back
to return to the previous menu.
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
• Engine Off Power Delay
menu.
Engine Off Options
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect® phone system (if equipped),
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
• Auto Entry/Exit Suspension — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
automatically lower the vehicle from ride height position
when the vehicle is shifted to park. To change the mode
status press the “Auto Entry/Exit Suspension” button on
4
348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to • Suspension Display Messages
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the
When “All” is selected, all the Air Suspension Alerts will
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
be displayed. When “Warnings Only” is selected only the
previous menu.
Air Suspension Warnings will be displayed.
Suspension — If Equipped
• Tire Jack Mode
After pressing the Suspension button on the touchscreen
When this feature is selected the air suspension system is
the following settings will be available.
disabled to assist with changing a spare tire. Press the
• Auto Entry/Exit Suspension
“Tire Jack Mode” button until a check-mark appears next
When this feature is selected, the vehicle lowers the to the feature showing the system has been activated or
suspension for easy entry/exit. Press the “Auto Entry/ the check-mark is removed showing the system has been
Exit Suspension” button until a check-mark appears next deactivated. Press the back arrow button on the touchto the feature showing the system has been activated or screen to return to the previous menu.
the check-mark is removed showing the system has been • Transport Mode
deactivated. Press the back arrow button on the touchWhen this feature is selected the air suspension system is
screen to return to the previous menu.
disabled to assist with flat bed towing. Press the “Transport Mode” button until a check-mark appears next to
the feature showing the system has been activated or the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349
check-mark is removed showing the system has been • Equalizer
deactivated. Press the back arrow button on the touchThis feature allows you to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble
screen to return to the previous menu.
settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–” setting
• Wheel Alignment Mode
buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on
the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
Before performing a wheel alignment this mode must be
touchscreen. Press the back arrow button on the touchenabled. Refer to your authorized dealer for further
screen to return to the previous menu.
information.
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your
Audio
finger up or down to change the setting as well as press
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the directly on the desired setting.
following settings will be available.
• Speed Adjusted Volume
• Balance/Fade
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
settings. Press and drag the speaker icon, use the arrows press the “Off,” “1,” “2” or “3” button on the touchscreen.
to adjust, or tap the ‘C’ icon to readjust to the center. Press Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return
the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the to the previous menu.
previous menu.
4
350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
touchscreen, then choose “Yes” or “No.” Press the back
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
menu.
To make your selection, press the “Surround Sound”
button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.” Press the Phone/Bluetooth®
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth®” button on the
previous menu.
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Surround Sound — If Equipped
• AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level
for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
To make your selection, press the AUX Volume Match
button on the touchscreen, choose a level from –3 to +3.
Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return
to the previous menu.
• Loudness — If Equipped
Loudness improves sound quality at lower volumes. To
make your selection, press the “Loudness” button on the
• Paired Phones
This feature shows which phones are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer
to the Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
• Paired Audio Sources
This feature shows which audio devices are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer
to the Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351
Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touch- to access the Subscription Information screen.
screen, the following settings will be available:
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
• Channel Skip
the screen or visit the provider online.
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make and is available for U.S. residents only.
your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the
touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip Restore Settings
followed by pressing the back arrow button on the
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the
touchscreen.
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Subscription Information
• Restore Settings
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
When this feature is selected it will reset the Display,
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings.
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
To restore the settings to their default setting, press the
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
“Restore Settings” button on the touchscreen and pop-up
the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
will appear asking #Are you sure you want to reset your
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
4
352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
settings to default?” select “OK” to restore, or “Cancel” to System Information
exit. Once the settings are restored, a pop-up appears After pressing the “System Information” button on the
stating #settings reset to default.#
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Clear Personal Data
• System Information
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button When System Information is selected, a System Informaon the touchscreen the following settings will be avail- tion screen will appear displaying the system software
able:
version.
• Clear Personal Data
Uconnect® RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED
When this feature is selected it will remove personal data
including Bluetooth® devices and presets. To remove For detailed information about your Uconnect® radio,
personal information, press the “Clear Personal Data” refer to your Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
button and a pop-up will appear asking #Are you sure iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
you want to clear all personal data?” select “OK” to
Clear, or “Cancel” to exit. Once the data has been cleared, This feature allows an iPod® or external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port.
a pop up appears stating #Personal data cleared.”
iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod®
and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353
may not fully support the iPod® control features. Please
visit Apple’s website for software updates.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
Uconnect® REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT (RSE)
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Your Rear Seat Entertainment System is designed to give
your family years of enjoyment. You can play your
favorite CDs, DVDs or Blu-ray™ Discs, listen to audio
over the wireless headphones, or plug and play a variety
of standard video games or audio devices. Please review
Rear Seat Entertainment System Screen
this Owner’s Manual to become familiar with its features • Place the ignition in the ON or ACC position.
and operation.
• Your vehicle may be equipped with a Blu-ray™ Disc
Getting Started
Player. If equipped with a Blu-ray™ Disc Player, the
icon will be present on the Player.
• Screen(s) located in the rear of front seats: Open the
LCD screen cover by lifting up on cover.
4
354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Turn on the Rear Seat Entertainment system by push- • With the Dual Video Screen System, Channel 1 (Rear 1)
ing the Power button on the remote control.
on the Remote Control and Headphones refers to
Screen 1 (driver’s side) and Channel 2 (Rear 2) on the
• When the Video Screen(s) are open and a DVD/BluRemote Control and Headphones refers to Screen 2
ray™ Disc is inserted into the Disc player, the screen(s)
(passenger side).
turn(s) ON automatically, the headphone transmitters
turn ON and playback begins.
Rear Seat Entertainment System Channel 1 (Rear 1)
Rear Seat Entertainment System Remote Control
Channel Selector
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355
Dual Video Screen
NOTE: Typically there are two different ways to operate
the features of the Rear Seat Entertainment System.
• The Remote Control
• The Touchscreen Radio (If Equipped)
Rear Seat Entertainment System Headphone Channel
Selector
• The system can be controlled by the front seat occupants utilizing either the touchscreen radio, or by the
rear seat occupants using the remote control.
4
356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To view a Blu-ray™ insert the disc into the Blu-ray™ Disc
Player. Playback will begin automatically after the BluPlay A Blu-ray™ Disc
ray™ Disc is recognized by the disc drive. If playback
The Blu-ray™ Disc player is located in the center console. does not begin automatically after the disc is inserted into
Blu-ray™ Disc Player follow these steps:
Blu-ray™ Disc Player
Using The Touchscreen Radio
Blu-ray™ Disc Player Location
Rear Media Control Screen
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357
1. RSE Channel 1 Mode
Channel being controlled by the front user. If this button
Indicates the current source for Screen 1/Channel 1; This is not highlighted select button to access controls for
button will be highlighted when it is the active Screen/ Screen 2/Channel 2 source.
Channel being controlled by the front user. If this button 6. Radio Full Screen Mode
is not highlighted select button to access controls for
Select this button to change to Full Screen Mode.
Screen 1/Channel 1 source.
7. Cabin Audio Mode
2. RSE Power
Select this button to change the cabin audio to the rear
Press to turn RSE On/Off.
entertainment source currently shown on the rear media
3. RSE Mute
control screen.
Mute rear headphones for the current ignition cycle. 8. RSE Mode
Pressing mute again will unmute rear headphones.
Select this button to change source for the active (high4. RSE Remote Control Lock Out
lighted) rear Screen/Channel on the rear media control
screen.
Press to enable/disable Remote Control functions.
5. RSE Channel 2 Mode
Indicates the current source for Screen 2/Channel 2; This
button will be highlighted when it is the active Screen/
• Press the Media button on the touchscreen, then press
the Rear Media button on the touchscreen.
4
358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Press the OK button on the touchscreen to begin
playing the Blu-ray™ Disc on the touchscreen radio.
Using The Remote Control
• Select an audio channel (Rear 1 for driver side rear
screen and Rear 2 for passenger side rear screen), then
press the source key and using the up and down
arrows, highlight disc from the menu and press the OK
button.
• Press the popup/menu key to navigate the disc menu
and options.
Play Video Games
Audio/Video RCA/HDMI Input Jacks
Audio/Video RCA/HDMI Jacks (AUX/HDMI Jacks) on
Connect the video game console to the Audio/Video
the side of each seat enable the monitor to display video
RCA/HDMI input jacks located on the side of each seat.
directly from a video camera, connect video games for
display on the screen, or play music directly from an MP3
player.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359
When connecting an external source to the AUX/HDMI 2. To watch a DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc on Rear 1 (driver side
input, ensure to follow the standard color coding for the
rear passenger) ensure the Remote Control and Headaudio/video jacks:
phone channel selector switch is on Rear 1.
1. HDMI Input
2. Right audio in (red)
3. Left audio in (white)
4. Video in (yellow)
3. To watch a DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc on Rear 2 (passenger
side rear passenger) ensure the Remote Control and
Headphone channel selector switch is on Rear 2.
Using The Remote Control
1. Push the SOURCE button on the Remote Control.
NOTE: Certain high-end video games, such as Playstation®4 and XBox One will exceed this power limit of the 2. While looking at Rear 1 or 2, highlight DISC by either
pushing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons, then push
vehicle’s Power Inverter.
ENTER/OK.
Play A DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc Using The
Touchscreen Radio
1. Insert the DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc with the label facing as
indicated on the DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc player. The radio
automatically selects the appropriate mode after the disc
is recognized and displays the menu screen or starts
playing the first track.
4
360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Select DISC Mode On The Rear Seat Entertainment Screen
Rear Media Control Screen
3. Press the 1 or 2 buttons on the touchscreen, the select
source button on the touchscreen and then the DISC
1. Press the Media button on the Uconnect® radio touchbutton on the touchscreen in the MEDIA column. To
screen.
exit press the X at the top right of the screen.
2. Press the Rear Media button to display the Rear Media
Control screen.
Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361
Important Notes For Dual Video Screen System
• The Rear Seat Entertainment System is able to transmit
two channels of stereo audio and video simultaneously.
• The Blu-ray™ Disc Player can play CDs, DVDs and
Blu-ray™ Discs.
• Selecting a video source on Rear 1, the video source
will display on Rear 1 and can be heard on Rear 1.
Rear Seat Entertainment Source Screen
NOTE: Pressing the screen on the radio while a DVD or
Blu-ray™ Disc is playing, brings up the basic remote
control functions for DVD play such as scene selection,
Play, Pause, FF, RW, and Stop. Pressing the X in the upper
corner will turn OFF the remote control screen functions.
• Selecting a video source on Rear 2, the video source
will display on Rear 2 and can be heard on Rear 2.
• Audio can be heard through the headphones even
when the screen(s) are closed.
4
362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Blu-ray™ Disc Player Remote Control — If
Equipped
audio while the screen is closed, push the Power
button to turn the headphone transmitter on.
2. Channel Selector Indicators — When a button is
pushed, the currently affected channel or channel
button is illuminated momentarily.
3. SOURCE — Push to enter Source Selection screen.
4. Channel/Screen Selector Switch — Indicates which
channel is being controlled by the remote control.
When the selector switch is in the Rear 1 position, the
remote controls the functionality of headphone Channel 1 (left screen). When the selector switch is in the
Rear 2 position, the remote controls the functionality
of headphone Channel 2 (right screen).
Blu-ray™ Player Remote Control
Controls And Indicators
1. Power — Turns the screen and wireless headphone
transmitter for the selected Channel on or off. To hear
5. ! — Push to navigate menus.
6. SETUP — Push to access the screen settings menu.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363
7. !!! — Push and hold to fast forward through the 15. BACK — Push to exit out of menus or return to
current audio track or video chapter.
source selection screen.
8. ! / % (Play/Pause) — Begin/resume or pause disc 16. # — Push to navigate menus.
play.
17. OK — Push to select the highlighted option in a
9. Four Colored Buttons — Push to access Blu-ray™ Disc
menu.
features.
18. " — Push to navigate menus.
10. POPUP/MENU — Push to bring up repeat and
19. $ — Push to navigate menus.
shuffle options, the Blu-ray™ Disc popup menu, the
Replacing The Remote Control Batteries
DVD title menu or to access disc menus.
11. KEYPAD — Push to navigate chapters or titles.
12. ▪ (Stop) — Stops disc play.
13. !"" — Push and hold to fast rewind through the
current audio track or video chapter.
14.
— Mutes headphone audio.
The remote control requires two AAA batteries for operation. To replace the batteries:
1. Locate the battery compartment on the back of the
remote, then slide the battery cover downward.
2. Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them
according to the polarity diagram shown.
3. Replace the battery compartment cover.
4
364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Headphones Operation
The headphones receive two separate channels of audio
using an infrared transmitter from the video screen.
If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control,
verify that the screen is turned on, the channel is not
muted and the headphone channel selector switch is on
the desired channel. If audio is still not heard, check that
fully charged batteries are installed in the headphones.
Rear Seat Entertainment Headphones
1 — Power Button
2 — Volume Control
3 — Channel Selection Switch
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365
Controls
The headphone power indicator and controls are located
on the right ear cup.
• When both the headphone and the remote control
channel selector switches are on Channel 2, the
Remote is controlling Channel 2 and the headphones
are tuned to the audio on Channel 2.
NOTE: The rear video system must be turned on before
sound can be heard from the headphones. To conserve 2. Push the SOURCE button on the remote control.
battery life, the headphones will automatically turn off 3. Pushing the SOURCE button will advance to the next
approximately three minutes after the rear video system
mode.
is turned off.
4. When the Mode Selection menu appears on screen,
Changing the Audio Mode for Headphones
use the cursor buttons on the remote control to navigate to the available modes and push the OK button to
1. Ensure the Remote Control channel/screen selector
select the new mode.
switch is in the same position as the headphone
selector switch.
NOTE:
• When both the headphone and the remote control
channel selector switches are on Channel 1, the
Remote is controlling Channel 1 and the headphones
are tuned to the audio on Channel 1.
5. To cancel out of the Mode Selection menu, push the
BACK button on the remote control.
4
366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Replacing The Headphone Batteries
How Long Does the Coverage Last? This warranty lasts
as long as you own the Product.
Each set of headphones requires two AAA batteries for
What Does This Warranty Cover? Except as specified
operation. To replace the batteries:
below, this warranty covers any Product that in normal
1. Locate the battery compartment on the left ear cup of
use is defective in workmanship or materials.
the headphones, and then slide the battery cover
What Does This Warranty Not Cover? This warranty
downward.
does not cover any damage or defect that results from
2. Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them misuse, abuse or modification of the Product other than
according to the polarity diagram shown.
by Unwired. Foam earpieces, which will wear over time
through normal use, are specifically not covered (replace3. Replace the battery compartment cover.
ment foam is available for a nominal charge). UNWIRED
Unwired® Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited
TECHNOLOGY IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY INJURIES
Warranty
OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR PROPERTY RESULTWho Does This Warranty Cover? This warranty covers ING FROM THE USE OF, OR ANY FAILURE OR DEthe initial user or purchaser (#you# or #your#) of this FECT IN, THE PRODUCT, NOR IS UNWIRED LIABLE
particular Unwired Technology LLC (#Unwired#) wire- FOR ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT,
less headphone (#Product#). The warranty is not transfer- INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY, PUable.
NITIVE OR OTHER DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR
NATURE WHATSOEVER. Some states and jurisdictions
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367
may not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or
consequential damages, so the above limitation may not
apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal
rights. You may also have other rights, which vary from
jurisdiction to jurisdiction.
If you have any questions or comments regarding your Unwired® wireless headphones, please phone 1-888-293-3332 or
email [email protected]
You may register your Unwired® wireless headphones
online at www.unwiredtechnology.com or by phone at
What Will Unwired® Do? Unwired®, at its option, will 1-888-293-3332.
repair or replace any defective Product. Unwired® reSystem Information
serves the right to replace any discontinued Product with
a comparable model. THIS WARRANTY IS THE SOLE Disc Menu
WARRANTY FOR THIS PRODUCT, SETS FORTH YOUR When listening to a CD Audio or CD Data disc, pushing
EXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING DEFECTIVE the remote control’s POP UP/MENU button displays a
PRODUCTS, AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WAR- list of all commands which control playback of the disc.
RANTIES (EXPRESS OR IMPLIED), INCLUDING ANY
WARRANTY OR MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
4
368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Display Settings
Display Settings menu. These settings control the appearance of the video on the screen. The factory default
settings are already set for optimum viewing, so there is
no need to change these settings under normal circumstances.
To change the settings, push the remote control’s navigation buttons ($, #) to select an item, then push the
remote control’s navigation buttons (!, ") to change the
value for the currently selected item. To reset all values
back to the original settings, select the Default Settings
menu option and push the remote control’s ENTER/OK
button.
Video Screen Display Settings
When watching a video source (Blu-ray™ Disc or DVD
Video with the disc in Play mode, Aux Video, etc.),
pushing the remote control’s SETUP button activates the
Disc Features control the remote Blu-ray™ Disc player’s
settings of DVD being watched in the remote player.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369
the remote control’s power button to turn audio on. If
To listen to only audio portion of the channel with the audio is still not heard, check that fully charged batteries
are installed in the headphones.
screen closed:
Disc Formats
• Set the audio to the desired source and channel.
The Blu-ray™ Disc player is capable of the playing the
• Close the video screen.
following types of discs (8 mm or 12 mm diameter):
• To change the current audio mode, push the remote
• BD: BDMV (Profile 1.1), BDAV (Profile 1.1)
control’s SOURCE button. This will automatically select the next available audio mode without using the • DVD: DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, AVCREC, AVCHD,
DVD-VR
Mode/Source Select menu.
Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed
• When the screen is reopened, the video screen will • CD: CD-DA, VCD, CD-TEXT
automatically turn back on and show the appropriate
• DVD/CD: MP3, WMA, AAC, DivX (versions 3 – 6)
display menu or media.
profile 3.0
If the screen is closed and there is no audio heard, verify
that the headphones are turned on (the ON indicator is
illuminated) and the headphone selector switch is on the
desired channel. If the headphones are turned on, push
4
370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
DVD Region Codes
Recorded Discs
The Blu-ray™ Disc player and many DVD discs are
coded by geographic region. These region codes must
match in order for the disc to play. If the region code for
the DVD disc does not match the region code for the
player, the disc will not play.
The Blu-ray™ Disc player will play CD-R and CD-RW
discs recorded in CD-Audio or Video-CD format, or as a
CD-ROM containing MP3 or WMA files. The player will
also play DVD-Video content recorded to a DVD-R or
DVD-RW disc. DVD-ROM discs (either pressed or recorded) are not supported.
DVD Audio Support
When a DVD-Audio disc is inserted in the Blu-ray™ Disc
player, the DVD-Audio title on the disc is played by
default (most DVD-Audio discs also have a Video title,
but the Video title is ignored). All multi-channel program
material is automatically mixed down to two channels,
which may result in a lowered apparent volume level. If
you increase the volume level to account for this change
in level, remember to lower the volume before changing
the disc or to another mode.
If you record a disc using a personal computer, there may
be cases where the Blu-ray™ Disc player may not be able
to play some or the entire disc, even if it is recorded in a
compatible format and is playable on other players. To
help avoid playback problems, use the following guidelines when recording discs.
• Open sessions are ignored. Only sessions that are
closed are playable.
• For multi-session CDs that contain only multiple CDAudio sessions, the player will renumber the tracks so
each track number is unique.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371
• For CD Data (or CD-ROM) discs, always use the Compressed Audio Files (MP3 and WMA)
ISO-9660 (Level 1 or Level 2), Joliet, or Romeo format.
The Blu-ray™ Disc player is capable of playing MP3
Other formats (such as UDF, HFS, or others) are not
(MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3) and WMA (Windows Media
supported.
Audio) files from a CD Data disc (usually a CD-R or
• The player recognizes a maximum of 512 files and 99 CD-RW).
folders per CD-R and CD-RW disc.
• The Blu-ray™ Disc player always uses the file exten• Mixed media recordable DVD formats will only play
sion to determine the audio format, so MP3 files must
the Video_TS portion of the disc.
always end with the extension #.mp3# or #.MP3# and
WMA files must always end with the extension #.wma#
If you are still having trouble writing a disc that is
or #.WMA#. To prevent incorrect playback, do not use
playable in the Blu-ray™ Disc player, check with the disc
these extensions for any other types of files.
recording software publisher for more information about
burning playable discs.
• For MP3 files, only version 1 ID3 tag data (such as
artist name, track title, album, etc.) are supported.
The recommended method for labeling recordable discs
(CD-R, CD-RW, and DVD-R) is with a permanent marker. • Any file that is copy protected (such as those downDo not use adhesive labels as they may separate from the
loaded from many online music stores) will not play.
disc, become stuck, and cause permanent damage to the
The Blu-ray™ player will automatically skip the file
DVD player.
and begin playing the next available file.
4
372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Other compression formats such as AAC, MP3 Pro, Radio displays. A dirty, damaged, or incompatible disc
Ogg Vorbis, and ATRAC3 will not play. The Blu-ray™ format are all potential causes for a #Disc Error# message.
player will automatically skip the file and begin playIf a disc has a damaged track which results in audible or
ing the next available file.
visible errors that persists for two seconds, the Blu-ray™
• If you are creating your own files, the recommended Disc player will attempt to continue playing the disc by
fixed bit rate for MP3 files is between 96 and 192Kbps skipping forward one to three seconds at a time. If the
and the recommended fixed bit rate for WMA files is end of the disc is reached, the Blu-ray™ Disc player will
between 64 and 192Kbps. Variable bit rates are also return to the beginning of the disc and attempt to play
supported. For both formats, the recommended the start of the first track.
sample rate is either 44.1kHz or 48kHz.
The Blu-ray™ Disc player may shut down during ex• To change the current file, use the remote control’s or tremely hot conditions, such as when the vehicle’s inteBlu-ray™ Disc player’s $ button to advance to the rior temperature is above 120° F (48.9° C). When this
next file, or the # button to return to the start of the occurs, the player will display #High Temp# and will shut
current or previous file.
off the Rear Seat displays until a safe temperature is
reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics
Disc Errors
of the Blu-ray™ Disc player.
If the Blu-ray™ Disc player is unable to read the disc, a
#Disc Error# message is displayed on the rear screen and
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373
Product Agreement
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
This product incorporates copyright protection technol- EQUIPPED
ogy that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellec- The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
tual property rights. Use of this copyright protection surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is access the switches.
intended for home or other limited viewing uses otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or
disassembly is prohibited.
Dolby® Digital and MLP Lossless Manufactured
under license from Dolby Laboratories. #Dolby#, #MLP
Lossless#, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpublished works.
Copyright 1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories. All right
reserved.
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)
4
374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push-button in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset button.
CD Player
Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next
Pushing the center button will make the radio switch track on the CD. Pushing the bottom of the switch once
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SXM/ will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
CD/AUX/VES, etc.).
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a after the current track begins to play.
push-button in the center. The function of the left-hand If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the
control is different depending on which mode you are in. second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
CD/DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc MAINTENANCE
each mode.
To keep a CD/DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc in good condition,
Radio Operation
take the following precautions:
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch 1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
wiping from center to edge.
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch- your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
ing the disc.
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
or anti-static sprays.
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
not using Uconnect® (if equipped).
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become Regulatory And Safety Information
too high.
USA/CANADA
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective coating Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized, The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio
or have protection encoding. Try a known good disc is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits.
before considering disc player service.
4
376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
manner that the radio is 20 cm or further from the human with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
body.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines 1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific 2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opcommunity.
eration.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless
radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie
Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de liemitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones. However, cence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions
suivantes: (1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouilthe use of wireless radios may be restricted in some
situations or environments, such as aboard airplanes. If lage, et (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est
you are unsure of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask
susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.
for authorization before turning on the wireless radio.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377
NOTE:
• This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio technician
for help.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather. This
system can be operated through either the controls on the
instrument panel or through the Uconnect® system display.
When the Uconnect® system is in different modes (Radio, Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and passenger
• If this equipment does cause harmful interference to temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the
radio or television reception, which can be determined display.
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
• Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
4
378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
General Overview
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons On The Faceplate
The buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect® system screen.
The buttons on the faceplate are located below the
Uconnect® screen.
Automatic Climate Controls — Buttons On The
Faceplate
Uconnect® 5.0 Automatic Temperature Controls —
Buttons On The Touchscreen
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator
will turn off.
2. A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
3. Recirculation Button
Uconnect® 8.4 Automatic Temperature Controls —
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when ON.
4. AUTO Operation Button
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both The Buttons On
The Faceplate And The Buttons On The Touchscreen) Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by
adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing
1. MAX A/C Button
this function will cause the system to switch between
Press and release to change the current setting, the manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing Operation” for more information.
4
380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5. Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side
window demist outlets. When the defrost button is
selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode
with maximum temperature settings for best windshield
and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing
this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual
mode. If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate
system will return the previous setting.
6. Rear Defrost Button
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Press and release this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). 7. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer
turns off after 10 minutes.
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381
slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow button the passenger temperature setting with the driver temon the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings.
perature setting. Changing the passenger temperature
setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
10. Blower Control
automatically exit Sync.
8. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow button
on the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air
forced through the climate system. There are seven
blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
speeds can be selected using either the blower control
knob on the faceplate or buttons on the touchscreen as
follows:
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will Blower Control Knob On The Faceplate
automatically exit Sync.
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower
9. SYNC
control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting.
Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower
Sync feature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated control knob counterclockwise.
when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize
4
382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Button On The Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
11. Modes
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
• Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of
the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved
up and down or side to side to regulate airflow
direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the
air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow
from these outlets.
• Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
warmer air from the floor outlets.
• Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
• Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This mode works best
in cold or snowy conditions.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 383
12. Climate Control OFF Button
the temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the
touchscreen for warmer temperature settings.
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control
ON/OFF.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
13. Driver Temperature Control Down Button
time.
Provides the driver with independent temperature con15. Temperature Control (5.0 Radio Only)
trol. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the Press the temperature button on the touchscreen to
temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on the regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger
touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
compartment. Moving the temperature bar into the red
area, indicates warmer temperatures. Moving the temNOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
perature bar into the blue area indicates cooler temperaadjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
tures.
time.
Climate Control Functions
14. Driver Temperature Control Up Button
A/C (Air Conditioning)
Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer tem- The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
perature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
4
384 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into
behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric
the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C
front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
button to turn off the air conditioning and manually
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make
MAX A/C
sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perforNOTE:
mance.
• For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix,
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the
Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but
prior settings. The button on the touchscreen illuminates
the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging
when MAX A/C is ON.
of the windows.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
select Defrost mode and adjust blower speed if
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the prior
needed.
settings and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 385
Recirculation
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
pressing the Recirculation control button. The
recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is
selected. Press the button a second time to turn off the
Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation
feature may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen
greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging
on the inside of the windshield. On systems with Manual
Climate Controls, the Recirculation mode is not allowed
in Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation.
Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode
is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this
mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink
and then turn off.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate or press the
“AUTO” button on the touchscreen.
4
386 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the • The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and pasunits by selecting the Uconnect® customersenger temperature buttons on the faceplate or butprogrammable feature. Refer to the “Uconnect® Systons on the touchscreen. Once the desired temperature
tem Settings” in this section of the manual.
is displayed, the system will achieve and automati- To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
cally maintain that comfort level.
mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is on low until the engine warms up. The blower will
not necessary to change the temperature. You will increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing Manual Operation Override
the system to function automatically.
The system allows for manual selection of blower speed,
NOTE:
air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation con• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings. trol.
The system automatically adjusts the temperature, The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
mode, and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at
as possible.
a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This
allows the front occupants to control the volume of air
circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 387
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C
operation and Recirculation control can also be manually
selected in Manual operation.
coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material
Standard MS.90032 and 50% water is recommended.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
NOTE: Each of these features operates independently
from each other. If any feature is controlled manually,
temperature control will continue to operate automatically.
Winter Operation
Operating Tips
Vacation Storage
Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months
is not recommended because it may cause window
fogging.
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
suggested control settings for various weather condi- (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
tions.
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
Summer Operation
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating.
A solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology)
4
388 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Window Fogging
Outside Air Intake
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes objectionable, increase blower
speed to improve airflow and clearing of the side windows. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild
but rainy or humid weather.
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter
The climate control system filters outside air containing
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be
• Recirculate without A/C should not be used for long totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instrucperiods, as fogging may occur.
tions.
• Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automatically adjust the climate control settings to reduce or
eliminate window fogging on the front windshield.
When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
NOTE:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 389
Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions
4
390 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect® VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Key Features:
Introducing Uconnect®
• 5” touchscreen
Start using Uconnect® Voice Recognition with these • Three buttons on either side of the display
helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands
and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect® 5.0
or 8.4A/8.4AN system.
Uconnect® 8.4AN
Uconnect® 5.0
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 391
If you see the
icon on your touchscreen, you have 3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned
the Uconnect® 8.4AN system. If not, you have a
on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
Uconnect® 8.4A system.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after
All you need to control your Uconnect® system with
the beep, then say your Voice Command.
your voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and 5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing
Command from current category.
instructions.
Get Started
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of noise that may impact
recognition.
4
392 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect® system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say&
• Cancel to stop a current voice session
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Uconnect® Voice Command
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive A Text
2 — For all radios: Push To Begin Radio or Media functions. For
8.4A/8.4AN only: Push to begin Navigation, Apps And Climate
Functions
3 — Push To End Call
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touchscreen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 393
4
Uconnect® 5.0
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN
394 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio® stations you would like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio® trial
required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say&
• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or
want to learn a Voice Command, press the VR button
and say “Help.” The system will provide you
with a list of commands.
Uconnect® 5.0 Radio
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 395
Media
Uconnect® offers connections via USB, SD, Bluetooth®
and auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only
available for connected USB and iPod® devices. (Remote
CD player optional and not available on all vehicles.)
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands and follow the prompts to
switch your media source or choose an artist.
• Change source to Bluetooth®
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Radio
• Change source to iPod®
• Change source to USB
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play
song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical
4
396 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all
of the music on your iPod® or USB device. Your Voice
Command must match exactly how the artist, album,
song and genre information is displayed.
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Media
Uconnect® 5.0 Media
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 397
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy
with Uconnect®. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone
button
and say “Call,” then pronounce the name
exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say
“Call John Smith work.”
4
. After the beep, say one of
Push the Phone button
the following commands&
• Call John Smith
• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
• Call back (call previous incoming phone number)
Uconnect® 5.0 Phone
398 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push
. After the beep, say: “Reply.”
the Phone button
2. Listen to the Uconnect® prompts. After the beep,
repeat one of the pre-defined messages and follow the
system prompts.
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Phone
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect® will announce incoming text messages. Push
and say Listen. (Must have comthe Phone button
patible mobile phone paired to Uconnect® system.)
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes.
Stuck in Traffic.
See you later.
Start without
No.
I’ll be Late.
me.
Okay.
Where are you? I will be <number> minutes
Are you there
Call me.
late.
yet?
I’ll call you
I need
See you in
later.
directions.
<number> of
minutes.
I’m on my way. Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost.
Thanks.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 399
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementation of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advantage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com. Apple iPhone® iOS6 or later supports reading incoming text messages only.
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to
adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice
Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or
steering wheel if equipped.
Climate (8.4A/8.4AN)
4
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures handsfree and keep everyone comfortable while you keep
moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate
control.)
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands:
• Set driver temperature to 70 degrees
• Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Climate
400 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN)
The Uconnect® navigation feature helps you save time
and become more productive when you know exactly
how to get to where you want to go. (Navigation is
optional on the Uconnect® 8.4A system. See your dealer
to activate navigation at any time.)
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
the beep, say:
. After
• For the 8.4A Uconnect® System, say: “Enter state.”
• For the 8.4AN Uconnect® System, say: “Navigate to
800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button
After the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.”
.
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Navigation
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 401
Uconnect® Access* (8.4A/8.4AN)
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take
advantage of the Uconnect® Access services in the next
section of this guide. To register with Uconnect® Access,
press the Apps button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get
started. Detailed registration instructions can be found
on the next page.
Remote Vehicle Start**
Remote Horn and Lights
Yelp® Search
Voice Texting
Roadside Assistance Call
*Uconnect® Access is available only on equipped veWi-Fi Hotspot***
hicles purchased within the continental United States and
Alaska. Services can only be used where coverage is **If vehicle is equipped.
available; see coverage map for details.
***Extra charges apply.
9-1-1 Call
Security Alarm Notification
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
4
402 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Register (8.4A/8.4AN)
1. Press the Apps button on the bottom of the 8.4-inch
touchscreen.
2. If a pop-up message appears, press Register or go to
the Favorite Apps menu and press Uconnect® Registration.
3. Read through the registration instructions. Enter and
confirm your personal email address. Then press
Send.
4. Check your personal inbox for an email from
Uconnect® Access.
5. Click on the link inside the email within 72 hours and
complete the easy online registration process to create
a personal Mopar® Owner Connect account linked to
your vehicle.
Uconnect® Registration 8.4A/8.4AN
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 403
Download the Uconnect® Access App to a compatible
Securely link your mobile device to your vehicle with the Apple® or Android® mobile devices. All you need to do
Uconnect® Access App. Once you have downloaded the is:
App, you may start your vehicle or lock it from virtually 1. After registering with Uconnect® Access, log on to
any distance. (Vehicle must be properly equipped with
your Mopar® Owner Connect account at
factory-installed Remote Start.)
moparownerconnect.com.
Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN)
2. On the Dashboard page, enter your mobile phone
number to receive a link to download the App on your
mobile device. Or go to iTunes®, or Google Play, and
search for the Uconnect® Access App.
3. To activate the App, enter your Mopar Owner Connect
user name and password and log in. Your vehicle is
then connected to your mobile device.
Mobile App
4
404 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN)
TIP:
1. To send a message, push the Phone button
. After • Not compatible with iPhone®.
the beep, say the following command: “Send mes• Messages are limited to 140 characters.
sage to John Smith.”
• The Messaging button on the touchscreen must be
2. Listen to the prompt. After the beep, dictate the
illuminated to use the feature.
message you would like to send. Wait for Uconnect®
Yelp® (8.4A/8.4AN)
to process your message.
3. The Uconnect® system will repeat your message and
provide a variety of options to add to, delete, send or
hear the message again. After the beep, tell Uconnect®
what you’d like to do. For instance, if you’re happy
with your message, after the beep, say: “Send.”
Once registered with Uconnect® Access, you can use
your voice to search for the most popular places or things
around you.
1. Press the “Apps” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “All Apps” button on the touchscreen.
You must be registered with Uconnect® Access and have
a compatible MAP – enabled smartphone to use your 3. Press the “Yelp” button on the touchscreen.
voice to send a personalized text message.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 405
4. Once the YELP® home screen appears on the touch, then say: “YELP
screen, push the VR button
search.”
5. Listen to the system prompts and after the beep, tell
Uconnect® the place or business that you’d like
Uconnect® to find.
4
TIP: Once you perform a search, you can reorganize the
results by selecting either the Best Match, Rating or
Distance tab on the top of the touchscreen display.
Yelp®
406 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SiriusXM Travel Link™ (8.4A/8.4AN)
Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings,
check a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast?
SiriusXM Travel Link™ is a suite of services that brings a
wealth of information right to your Uconnect® 8.4AN
system. (Not available for 8.4A system.)
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands:
• Show fuel prices
• Show 5 - day weather forecast
• Show extended weather
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Command.
SiriusXM Travel Link™
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 407
cAdditional Information
Mon. – Fri., 7:00 am – 12:00 am, ET
© 2015 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp,
Yelp logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered
trademarks of Yelp.
Sat., 8:00 am – 10:00 pm, ET
Uconnect® System Support:
• U.S. residents call
DriveUconnect.com
1-877-855-8400
or
visit
• Canadian residents call 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French) or visit DriveUconnect.ca
Sun., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET
Uconnect® Access Services Support 1-855-792-4241.
Please have your Uconnect® Security PIN ready when
you call.
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
! STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .422
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
▫ Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
▫ Eight–Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . .424
▫ Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or
! FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION . . . . . . . . .434
−29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
▫ Quadra-Trac I® Operating Instructions/
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
Precautions — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
! ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .420
! AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . .420
▫ Quadra-Trac II® Operating Instructions/
Precautions — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
▫ Shift Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
5
410 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Shifting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
▫ Quadra-Drive® II System — If Equipped . . . . .441
! SELEC-TERRAIN™ — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .442
▫ Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
▫ Driver Information Display (DID) Messages . . .444
! QUADRA-LIFT™ — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .444
▫ Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
▫ Air Suspension Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
▫ Driver Information Display (DID) Messages . . .449
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
! ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
! OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
▫ Quadra-Lift™ — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
▫ When To Use 4WD LOW Range — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
▫ Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
▫ Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand . . . . . . . . . .457
▫ Hill Climbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
▫ Traction Downhill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
▫ After Driving Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
! POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
▫ 3.6L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
▫ 5.7L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
! FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINE
ONLY — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
! PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
STARTING AND OPERATING 411
! BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
! ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .467
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .467
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .469
▫ Selec Speed Control (SSC) — If Equipped
(Four-Wheel Drive Models With MP3023
Two-Speed Transfer Case Only) . . . . . . . . . . .482
▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470 ! TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . .470
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .471
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .491
▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .492
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .494
▫ Ready Alert Braking — If Equipped . . . . . . . .477 ! TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .499
▫ Rain Brake Support — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .477
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
▫ Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
(Four-Wheel Drive Models With MP3023
Two-Speed Transfer Case Only) . . . . . . . . . . .478
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .502
5
412 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
! TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .512
! TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .513
! TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . . .514
▫ Premium System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
▫ Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
▫ Service Tpm System Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
! FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
▫ 3.6L Engine — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
▫ 5.7L Engine — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .524
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
STARTING AND OPERATING 413
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .526 ! VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
! FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
! TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
▫ Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal (Summit
Models) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
! ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530 ! SNOW PLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
▫ Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release. . . . . . . . .533
5
414 STARTING AND OPERATING
! RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .552
▫ Recreational Towing – Two-Wheel Drive
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
▫ Recreational Towing – Quadra-Trac I®
(Single-Speed Transfer Case) Four-Wheel Drive
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
▫ Recreational Towing — Quadra–Trac II® /
Quadra–Drive® II Four-Wheel Drive Models . . .554
STARTING AND OPERATING 415
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the Key Fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in
a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift
lever/transmission gear selector.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition (of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™) in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
Automatic Transmission
The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
5
416 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push
of a button, as long as the Remote
Start/Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Key Fob
is in the passenger compartment.
Normal Starting
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
STARTING AND OPERATING 417
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, push the button again.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button
position. If the shift lever/gear selector is not in PARK
and the ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed
once, the Driver Information Display (DID) will display a “Vehicle Not In Park” message and the engine
will remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of the
PARK position, or it could roll.
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
1. Place the shift lever/gear selector in PARK, then push PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30
and release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
OFF position.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
3. If the shift lever/gear selector is not in PARK, the
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two
NEUTRAL Position)
seconds or three short pushes in a row with the vehicle
speed above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
shut off. The ignition switch position will remain in ignition switch. It has four positions, OFF, ACC, RUN
the ACC position until the shift lever/gear selector is
in PARK and the button is pushed twice to the OFF
5
418 STARTING AND OPERATING
and START. To change the ignition positions without Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C)
starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
steps:
an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
• Starting with the ignition in the OFF position,
• Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place If Engine Fails To Start
the ignition to the ACC position (DID will display
WARNING!
“ACC”),
• Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to place the ignition to the RUN position (DID will
display “ON/RUN”),
• Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
return the ignition to the OFF position (DID will
display “OFF”).
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 419
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button)
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather# procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel:
1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
2. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it.
3. Push and release the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
The starter motor will engage automatically, run for 10
seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release
the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
5
420 STARTING AND OPERATING
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
WARNING!
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one • It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
The engine block heater cord is located:
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
• 3.6L Engine — Coiled and strapped to the engine oil
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
dipstick tube.
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
• 5.7L Engine — Bundled and fastened to the injector
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
harness.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 421
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob.
When the ignition is in the OFF position, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
5
422 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
before the engine can be turned off. This helps the driver
avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing
the transmission in PARK.
This system also locks the transmission in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in the OFF position.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission
out of PARK, the engine must be running and the brake
pedal must be pressed.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from
shifting out of PARK.
NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is
Key Ignition Park Interlock
stopped or moving at low speeds.
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
STARTING AND OPERATING 423
When the Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode is engaged, the
The Fuel Economy (ECO) mode can improve the vehi- vehicle control systems will change the following:
cle’s overall fuel economy during normal driving condi- • The transmission will upshift sooner and downshift
tions. To disable ECO mode, push the “ECO” switch in
later.
the center stack of the instrument panel and the amber
• The torque converter clutch may engage at lower
light will go out indicating ECO mode is disabled.
engine speeds and remain on longer.
Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode
• The overall driving performance will be more conservative.
• Vehicles with Quadra-Lift™ air suspension will operate in #Aero# mode over a broader speed range. Refer
to #Quadra-Lift™# in #Starting and Operating# for
further information.
• Some ECO mode functions may be temporarily inhibited based on temperature and other factors.
Fuel Economy Mode Switch
5
424 STARTING AND OPERATING
Active Noise Cancellation — Summit Models Only
Your vehicle is equipped with an Active Noise Cancellation System. This system uses four microphones embedded in the headliner to detect undesirable exhaust noise.
An onboard frequency generator creates counteracting
sound waves through the audio system to help keep the
vehicle quiet.
Eight–Speed Automatic Transmission
The electronic shift lever in this vehicle does not slide like
a conventional shifter. Instead, the shift lever is spring
loaded and moves forward and rearward, always returning to the center position after each gear is selected. The
transmission gear (PRND) is displayed both on the shift
lever and in the Driver Information Display (DID). To
select a gear range, press the lock button on the shift lever
and move the lever rearward or forward. You must also
press the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of
PARK, or to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low
speeds (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in this section). To shift past multiple gear ranges at
once (such as PARK to DRIVE), move the lever past the
first (or second) detent. Select the DRIVE range for
normal driving.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
STARTING AND OPERATING 425
The transmission shift lever provides PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, DRIVE and SPORT shift positions. Once in
the DRIVE range, tapping the shift lever rearward will
toggle between SPORT mode and DRIVE mode. You do
not need to push the shift lever button when toggling
between DRIVE and SPORT modes. Manual shifts can be
made using the shift paddles mounted on the steering
wheel. Pressing the shift paddles (-/+) while in the
DRIVE or SPORT position will manually select the transmission gear, and will display the current gear in the
instrument cluster. Refer to #Paddle Shift Mode# in this
section for further information.
5
Shift Lever
426 STARTING AND OPERATING
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. NOTE: On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the
transfer case is in a drive position.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
Gear Ranges
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
shift lever out of PARK with the brake pedal
released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK
before leaving the vehicle.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 427
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When
the ignition is in the OFF position, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
5
428 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must start the engine, and also press the brake
pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift lever could
result.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK position:
• When shifting into PARK, press the lock button on the
shift lever and push the lever all the way forward until
it stops. When released, the lever will return to the
center position.
STARTING AND OPERATING 429
• With brake pedal released, look at the transmission
gear position display and verify that it indicates the
PARK position (P).
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. Apply the parking
brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must
leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
5
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
430 STARTING AND OPERATING
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F [-30°C] or
below), transmission operation may be modified dependThis range should be used for most city and highway
ing on engine and transmission temperature as well as
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downvehicle speed. Normal operation will resume once the
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris- SPORT (S)
tics under all normal operating conditions.
This mode alters the transmission’s automatic shift
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are inwhen operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi- creased to make full use of available engine power. To
tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or switch between DRIVE and SPORT modes, tap the shift
while towing heavy trailers), use the Paddle Shift lever rearward. SPORT mode is only accessible from
switches (refer to #Paddle Shift Mode# in this section for DRIVE.
further information) to select a lower gear. Under these
NOTE: When Sport Mode is enabled, vehicles with the
conditions, using a lower gear will improve performance
Quadra-Lift™ air suspension system will operate in
and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shift“Aero” Mode. Please refer to #Quadra-Lift™# in #Starting
ing and heat buildup.
and Operating# for further information.
DRIVE (D)
STARTING AND OPERATING 431
NOTE: In cases where the instrument cluster message
Transmission function is monitored electronically for indicates the transmission may not re-engage after enabnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could gine shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired
location (preferably, at your authorized dealer).
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may 1. Stop the vehicle.
operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not,
Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the
shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
engine may stall. In some situations, the transmission
may not re-engage if the engine is turned off and 3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. On
restarted. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be
vehicles with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, press and hold
illuminated. A message in the instrument cluster will
the ignition switch until the engine turns OFF.
inform the driver of the more serious conditions, and
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
indicate what actions may be necessary.
5. Restart the engine.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the 6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
following steps:
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
5
432 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
Operation
When the transmission is in DRIVE or SPORT mode, it will
operate automatically, shifting between the eight available
gears. To activate Paddle Shift mode, simply tap one of the
steering wheel-mounted shift paddles (+/-) while in DRIVE
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer or SPORT mode. Tapping (-) to enter Paddle Shift mode will
downshift the transmission to the next lower gear, while
service is required.
using (+) to enter Paddle Shift mode will retain the current
Paddle Shift Mode
gear. When Paddle Shift mode is active, the current transPaddle Shift mode is a driver-interactive transmission mission gear is displayed in the instrument cluster.
feature providing manual shift control, giving you more In Paddle Shift mode, the transmission will shift up or
control of the vehicle. Paddle Shift allows you to maxi- down when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver, unless
mize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and an engine lugging or overspeed condition would result. It
downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance. will remain in the selected gear until another upshift or
This system can also provide you with more control downshift is chosen, except as described below.
during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions,
mountain driving, trailer towing, and many other situa- • The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
tions.
display the current gear.
STARTING AND OPERATING 433
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first • Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
Paddle Shift mode is enabled.
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
• The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a
vehicle is accelerated.
fault or overheat condition is detected.
• You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear
NOTE: When Selec-Speed or Hill Descent Control is
(or third gear, in 4LO range, Snow mode, or Sand
enabled, Paddle Shift mode is not active. Pushing the
mode). Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in
(+/-) shift paddles in Selec-Speed or Hill Descent Control
second gear. Starting out in second gear can be helpful
simply limits the highest allowed gear. Shifts below and
in snowy or icy conditions.
up to that gear will occur automatically.
• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
To disengage Paddle Shift mode, push and hold the (+)
over-speed, that shift will not occur.
shift paddle until #D# or #S# is once again indicated in the
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low instrument cluster. You can shift in or out of Paddle Shift
of a vehicle speed.
mode at any time without taking your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
• Holding the (-) paddle depressed will downshift the
transmission to the lowest gear possible at the current
speed.
5
434 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
Quadra-Trac I® Operating Instructions/
Precautions — If Equipped
The Quadra-Trac I® is a single-speed (HI range only)
transfer case, which provides convenient full-time fourwheel drive. No driver interaction is required. The Brake
Traction Control (BTC) System, which combines standard
ABS and Traction Control, provides resistance to any
wheel that is slipping to allow additional torque transfer
to wheels with traction.
NOTE: The Quadra-Trac I® system is not appropriate
for conditions where 4WD LOW range is recommended.
Refer to “Off-Road Driving Tips” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
Quadra-Trac II® Operating Instructions/
Precautions — If Equipped
The Quadra-Trac II® transfer case is fully automatic in
the normal driving 4WD AUTO mode. The Quadra-Trac
II® transfer case provides three mode positions:
• 4WD HI
• NEUTRAL
• 4WD LOW
This transfer case is fully automatic in the 4WD HI mode.
When additional traction is required, the 4WD LOW
position can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts
together and force the front and rear wheels to rotate at
STARTING AND OPERATING 435
the same speed. The 4WD LOW position is intended for
loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD
LOW position on dry, hard-surfaced roads may cause
increased tire wear and damage to driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the 4WD HI
position at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed
the engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position
disengages both the front and rear drive shafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll,
even if the transmission is in PARK. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type, and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference will adversely affect shifting and
cause damage to the transfer case.
Shift Positions
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction, For additional information on the appropriate use of each
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping 4WD system mode position, see the information below:
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
4WD AUTO
This range is used on surfaces such as ice, snow, gravel,
sand, and dry hard pavement.
5
436 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Refer to “Selec-Terrain® – If Equipped” in “Starting and Operating” for further information on the various positions and their intended usages.
NEUTRAL
WARNING! (Continued)
to roll, even if the transmission is in PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.
This range disengages the driveline from the powertrain.
It is to be used for flat towing behind another vehicle. 4WD LOW
Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting and Operat- This range is for low speed four-wheel drive. It provides
ing” for further information.
an additional gear reduction which allows for increased
torque to be delivered to both the front and rear wheels
while providing maximum pulling power for loose,
WARNING!
slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave (40 km/h).
the vehicle unattended with the power transfer unit
in the NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully NOTE: Refer to “Selec-Terrain® – If Equipped” for furengaging the parking brake. The NEUTRAL (N) ther information on the various positions and their
position disengages both the front and rear drive intended usages.
shafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 437
Shifting Procedures
4WD HI To 4WD LOW
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h), the
ignition switch in the ON position or the engine running,
shift the transmission into “N”, and push the “4WD
LOW” button once on the transfer case switch. The “4WD
LOW” indicator light in the instrument cluster will begin
to flash and remain on solid when the shift is complete.
5
Transfer Case Switch
438 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, or a NOTE:
transfer case motor temperature protection condition
• If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, or a transfer
exists, a “For 4x4 Low Slow Below 3 mph (5 km/h) Put
case motor temperature protection condition exists, a
Trans in “N” Press 4 Low” message will flash from the
“For 4x4 High Slow Below 3 mph (5 km/h) Put Trans
Driver Information Display (DID). Refer to “Driver Inin N push 4 Low” message will flash from the Driver
formation Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your InInformation Display (DID). Refer to “Driver Informastrument Panel” for further information.
tion Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
4WD LOW To 4WD HI
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h), the • Shifting into or out of 4WD LOW is possible with the
ignition switch in the ON position or the engine running,
vehicle completely stopped; however, difficulty may
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL, and push the
occur due to the mating clutch teeth not being prop“4WD LOW” button once on the transfer case switch. The
erly aligned. Several attempts may be required for
“4WD LOW” indicator light in the instrument cluster
clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur.
will flash and go out when the shift is complete.
The preferred method is with the vehicle rolling 0 to
3 mph (0 to 5 km/h). If the vehicle is moving faster
than 3 mph (5 km/h), the transfer case will not allow
the shift.
STARTING AND OPERATING 439
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging
the parking brake. The NEUTRAL (N) position disengages both the front and rear drive shafts from the
powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if
the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is not in
the vehicle.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, with the engine
running.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
4. If vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift™ air suspension, ensure the vehicle is set to Normal Ride Height.
5. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push and hold
the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the selector switch) for four seconds. The
light behind the NEUTRAL (N) symbol will blink,
indicating shift in progress. The light will stop blinking (stay on solid) when the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is
complete. A “NEUTRAL” message will appear in the
Driver Information Display (DID). Refer to “Driver
Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
5
440 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a “To
Tow Vehicle Safely, Read Neutral Shift Procedure in
Owners Manual” message will flash from the Driver
Information Display (DID). Refer to “Driver Information
Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N) Switch
2.
6. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL (N)
3.
light stays on, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
4.
7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
5.
8. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure
that there is no vehicle movement.
Firmly apply the parking brake.
Start the engine.
Press and hold the brake pedal.
Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
STARTING AND OPERATING 441
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push and hold 8. After the NEUTRAL (N) button has been released, the
the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button (lotransfer case will shift to the position indicated by the
cated by the selector switch) for one second.
selector switch.
Quadra-Drive® II System — If Equipped
The optional Quadra-Drive® II System features two
torque transfer couplings. The couplings include an
Electronic Limited-Slip Differential (ELSD) rear axle and
the Quadra-Trac II® transfer case. The optional ELSD
axle is fully automatic and requires no driver input to
operate. Under normal driving conditions, the unit functions as a standard axle, balancing torque evenly between
left and right wheels. With a traction difference between
left and right wheels, the coupling will sense a speed
difference. As one wheel begins to spin faster than the
other, torque will automatically transfer from the wheel
NEUTRAL (N) Switch
7. When the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns off, that has less traction, to the wheel that has traction. While
the transfer case and axle coupling differ in design, their
release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
5
442 STARTING AND OPERATING
operation is similar. Follow the Quadra-Trac II® transfer
case shifting information, preceding this section, for
shifting this system.
SELEC-TERRAIN™ — IF EQUIPPED
Description
Selec-Terrain™ combines the capabilities of the vehicle
control systems, along with driver input, to provide the
best performance for all terrains.
Selec-Terrain™ Switch
Selec-Terrain™ consists of the following positions:
• Snow – Tuning set for additional stability in inclement
weather. Use on and off road on loose traction surfaces
such as snow. When in Snow mode (depending on
certain operating conditions), the transmission may use
second gear (rather than first gear) during launches, to
STARTING AND OPERATING 443
minimize wheel slippage. If equipped with air suspension, the default ride height for Snow is NRH.
surfaces. The electronic brake controls are set to limit
traction control management of throttle and wheel
spin. If equipped with air suspension, the level will
change to Off Road 1.
• Auto – Fully automatic full time four-wheel drive
operation can be used on and off road. Balances
traction with seamless steering feel to provide im- • Rock – Off road calibration only available in 4WD Low
proved handling and acceleration over two-wheel
range. The vehicle is raised (if equipped with Air
Suspension) for improved ground clearance. Traction
drive vehicles. If equipped with air suspension, the
based tuning with improved steer-ability for use on high
level will change to NRH.
traction off-road surfaces. Use for low speed obstacles
• Sand – Off road calibration for use on low traction
such as large rocks, deep ruts, etc. If equipped with air
surfaces such as sand or wet grass. Driveline is maxisuspension, the vehicle level will change to Off-Road 2.
mized for traction. Some binding may be felt on less
If the Selec-Terrain™ switch is in ROCK mode, and the
forgiving surfaces. The electronic brake controls are set
transfer case is switched from 4WD Low to 4WD High,
to limit traction control management of throttle and
the Selec-Terrain™ system will return to AUTO.
wheel spin. If equipped with air suspension, the
NOTE: Activate the Hill Descent Control or Selec Speed
default ride height for Sand is NRH.
Control for steep downhill control. See “Electronic Brake
• Mud – Off road calibration for use on low traction Control System” in this section for further information.
surfaces such as mud. Driveline is maximized for
traction. Some binding may be felt on less forgiving
5
444 STARTING AND OPERATING
Driver Information Display (DID) Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will
appear in the DID display. Refer to “Driver Information
Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
QUADRA-LIFT™ — IF EQUIPPED
Description
The Quadra-Lift™ air suspension system provides full
time load leveling capability along with the benefit of
vehicle height adjustment by the push of a button.
Selec-Terrain™ Switch
1
2
3
4
5
6
—
—
—
—
—
—
Up Button
Down Button
Entry/Exit Mode Indicator Lamp (Customer Selectable)
Normal Ride Height Indicator Lamp (Customer Selectable)
Off-Road 1 Indicator Lamp (Customer Selectable)
Off-Road 2 Indicator Lamp (Customer Selectable)
STARTING AND OPERATING 445
• Normal Ride Height (NRH) – This is the standard
position of the suspension and is meant for normal
driving.
required. To enter OR2, push the “Up” button twice
from the NRH position or once from the OR1 position
while vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h). While
in OR2, if the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h)
the vehicle height will be automatically lowered to
OR1. Refer to “Off-Road Driving Tips” in “Starting
and Operating” for further information.
• Off-Road 1 (OR1) (Raises the vehicle approximately
1.1 in (28 mm) – This is the primary position for all
off-road driving until OR2 is needed. A smoother and
more comfortable ride will result. Push the “Up”
button once from the NRH position while the vehicle • Aero Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately 0.6 in
speed is below 38 mph (61 km/h). When in the OR1
(15 mm) – This position provides improved aerodynamics by lowering the vehicle. The vehicle will
position, if the vehicle speed remains between 40 mph
automatically enter Aero Mode when the vehicle
(64 km/h) and 50 mph (80 km/h) for greater than 20
speed remains between 52 mph (83 km/h) and 56 mph
seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds 50 mph
(90 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle
(80 km/h), the vehicle will be automatically lowered to
speed exceeds 56 mph (90 km/h). The vehicle will
NRH. Refer to “Off-Road Driving Tips” in “Starting
return to NRH from Aero Mode if the vehicle speed
and Operating” for further information.
remains between 20 mph (32 km/h) and 25 mph
• Off-Road 2 (OR2) (Raises the vehicle approximately
(40 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle
2.2 in (55 mm) – This position is intended for offroading use only where maximum ground clearance is
5
446 STARTING AND OPERATING
speed falls below 20 mph (32 km/h). The vehicle will NOTE: Automatic lowering of the vehicle into Entry/
enter Aero Mode, regardless of vehicle speed if the Exit Mode can be enabled through the Uconnect® Touchshift lever is in the “SPORT” position.
Screen Radio. If this feature is enabled, the vehicle will
only lower if the shift lever is in #PARK#, the terrain
• Entry/Exit Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately
switch is in #AUTO#, the transfer-case is in #AUTO” and
1.6 in (40 mm) – This position lowers the vehicle for
the vehicle level should be either in Normal or Aero
easier passenger entry and exit as well as lowering the
Mode. The Vehicle will not automatically lower if the air
rear of the vehicle for easier loading and unloading of
suspension level is in Off Rd 2 or Off Rd 1. If the vehicle
cargo. To enter Entry/Exit Mode, push the “Down”
is equipped with Intrusion Theft Module (ITM), the
button once from (NRH) while the vehicle speed is
lowering will be suppressed when the ignition is
below 25 mph (40 km/h). Once the vehicle speed goes
switched Off and the Door is Open to prevent setting the
below 15 mph (24 km/h) the vehicle height will begin
alarm Off.
to lower. If the vehicle speed remains between 15 mph
(24 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h) for greater than 60
seconds, or the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph The Selec-Terrain™ switch will automatically change the
(40 km/h) the Entry/Exit Mode change will be can- vehicle to the proper height based on the position of the
celled. To exit Entry/Exit Mode, press the “Up” button Selec-Terrain™ switch. The height can be changed from
once while in Entry/Exit Mode or drive the vehicle the default Selec-Terrain™ setting by normal use of the
air suspension buttons. Refer to “Selec-Terrain™” in
over 15 mph (24 km/h).
“Starting and Operating” for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 447
The system requires that the engine be running for all
changes. When lowering the vehicle all of the doors,
including the liftgate, must be closed. If a door is opened
at any time while the vehicle is lowering the change will
not be completed until the open door(s) is closed.
To assist with changing a spare tire, the Quadra-Lift™ air
suspension system has a feature which allows the automatic leveling to be disabled. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
The Quadra-Lift™ air suspension system uses a lifting
and lowering pattern which keeps the headlights from
incorrectly shining into oncoming traffic. When raising
the vehicle, the rear of the vehicle will move up first and
then the front. When lowering the vehicle, the front will
move down first and then the rear.
NOTE: If equipped with a touch screen radio all
enabling/disabling of air suspension features must be
done through the radio. Refer to “Uconnect® Access
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
After the engine is turned off, it may be noticed that the
air suspension system operates briefly, this is normal. The
system is correcting the position of the vehicle to ensure
a proper appearance.
WARNING!
The air suspension system uses a high pressure
volume of air to operate the system. To avoid personal injury or damage to the system, see your
authorized dealer for service.
5
448 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine
The Air Suspension system has multiple modes to protect running.
the system in unique situations:
Wheel Alignment Mode
Air Suspension Modes
Before performing a wheel alignment this mode must be
To assist with changing a spare tire, the air suspension enabled. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
system has a feature which allows the automatic leveling
to be disabled. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Under- NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information. running.
Tire/Jack Mode
NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine If equipped with a touch screen radio all enabling/
running.
disabling of air suspension features must be done
through the radio. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
Transport Mode
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further inTo assist with flat bed towing, the air suspension system formation.
has a feature which will put the vehicle into Entry/Exit
height and disable the automatic load leveling system.
Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 449
threshold, etc). The “UP” button can be pressed multiple
times, each press will raise the requested level by one
When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will
position up to a maximum position of OR2 or the highest
appear in the DID display. Refer to “Driver Information
position allowed based on current conditions (i.e. vehicle
Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
speed, etc).
Panel” for further information.
Pressing the “DOWN” button once will move the susOperation
pension one position lower from the current level, asThe indicator lamps 3 through 6 will illuminate to show suming all conditions are met (i.e. engine running, doors
the current position of the vehicle. Flashing indicator closed, speed below threshold, etc). The “DOWN” button
lamps will show a position which the system is working can be pressed multiple times. Each press will lower the
to achieve. When raising, if multiple indicator lamps are requested level by one position down to a minimum of
flashing on the “Up” button, the highest flashing indica- Park Mode or the lowest position allowed based on
tor lamp is the position the system is working to achieve. current conditions (i.e. vehicle speed, etc.)
When lowering, if multiple indicators are flashing on the
Automatic height changes will occur based on vehicle
#Up# button the lowest solid indicator lamp is the posispeed and the current vehicle height. The indicator lamps
tion the system is working to achieve.
and DID messages will operate the same for automatic
Pressing the “UP” button once will move the suspension changes and user requested changes.
one position higher from the current position, assuming
all conditions are met (i.e. engine running, speed below
Driver Information Display (DID) Messages
5
450 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Off-Road 2 (OR2) – Indicator lamps 4, 5, and 6 will be
illuminated when the vehicle is in OR2.
• Off-Road 1 (OR1) – Indicator lamps 4 and 5 will be
illuminated when the vehicle is in OR1.
• Normal Ride Height (NRH) – Indicator lamp 4 will be
illuminated when the vehicle is in this position.
height change will be paused until the vehicle speed
either goes below 15 mph (24 km/h) and the height
change continues to Entry/Exit Mode, or exceeds
25 mph (40 km/h) and the vehicle height will return to
NRH. Entry/Exit Mode may be selected while the
vehicle is not moving provided that the engine is still
running and all doors remain closed.
• Entry/Exit Mode – Indicator lamp 3 will be illumi- • Transport Mode - No indicator lamps will be illuminated when the vehicle is in Entry/Exit Mode. If
nated. Customer driving will disable Transport Mode.
Entry/Exit Mode is requested while vehicle speed is
• Tire/Jack Mode - indicator lamps 3 and 6 will be
between 15 mph (24 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h),
illuminated. Customer driving will disable Tire/Jack
indicator lamp 4 will remain on solid and indicator
Mode.
lamp 3 will flash as the system waits for the vehicle to
reduce speed. If vehicle speed is reduced to, and kept • Wheel Alignment Mode - indicator lamps 3 and 4 will
below, 15 mph (24 km/h) indicator lamp 4 will turn off
be illuminated. Customer driving will disable Wheel
and indicator lamp 3 will flash until Entry/Exit Mode
Alignment Mode.
is achieved at which point indicator lamp 3 will go
solid. If during the height change to Entry/Exit Mode,
the vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h), the
STARTING AND OPERATING 451
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a
narrower track to make them capable of performing in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design
characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than
ordinary cars.
NOTE: Prior to off-road driving with non-Summit models that are also equipped with an Off Road Package,
remove the lower fascia to prevent damage. The lower
fascia is attached to the lower part of the front fascia with
seven quarter turn fasteners and can be removed by
hand. The front license plate bracket must be removed
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better
first if equipped.
view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems.
They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as
conventional two-wheel drive vehicles any more than
low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp
turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this
type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in
loss of control or vehicle rollover.
5
452 STARTING AND OPERATING
Lower Front Fascia Removal:
1. Remove the seven quarter turn fasteners.
2. Starting on one side of the vehicle, disengage lower
fascia from the upper fascia. Grasp the portion inside
the wheel well. Pulling it downwards and toward you,
separate the tabs from the slots in the upper fascia.
3. Continue working your way across the vehicle, separating the remaining tabs from the slots in the upper
fascia.
Front Air Dam
1 — Front Bumper
2 — Front Air Dam Fasteners
NOTE: Do not allow the lower fascia to freely hang from
the tabs in the opposite corner as damage to lower and
upper fascia may result.
4. Store the lower fascia in a safe location.
NOTE: On Summit models the lower front fascia is not NOTE: It is recommend to also remove the radar sensor
on vehicle equipped to Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC).
removable.
This radar sensor is specifically calibrated to your vehicle
and is not interchangeable with other radar sensors.
STARTING AND OPERATING 453
Radar sensor removal procedure (If equipped with
Adaptive Cruise Control [ACC]):
1. With the lower fascia removed, which provides access
to the sensor and bracket, disconnect the wiring
harness from the sensor.
2. Using a suitable tool, disconnect the wire clip from the
bracket.
5
3. Using a suitable tool, remove the two fasteners that
hold the sensor bracket to the bumper beam.
NOTE: It is recommended to scribe location to assist in
reinstallation.
1 — Inside Bumper Beam
2 — Protective Connector Location
4. Locate the protective connector on the rear of the 3 — Sensor Bracket Fasteners
bumper beam.
4 — Sensor Bracket
NOTE: Only models with the Off Road Package are
equipped with the a protective connector.
454 STARTING AND OPERATING
5. Remove the plug from the protective connector and NOTE: Some alignment may be required upon fascia
install on the sensor.
installation to align sensor with fascia.
6. Insert the wiring harness connector into the protective 4. Install the wiring harness connector into the radar
connector.
sensor.
7. Store sensor and bracket in a safe place.
NOTE: If you receive a fault, see your authorized dealer
they may need to perform a sensor alignment.
NOTE: All cruise control functions will be disabled when
the radar sensor is disconnected.
Lower Front Fascia Installation (This will only work if
you have a helper. We suggest):
Radar sensor installation procedure (If equipped with
Adaptive Cruise Control [ACC]):
1. Starting at the center of the vehicle, engage a sufficient
number of tabs to support the weight of the lower
1. Disconnect the wiring harness connector from the
fascia (typically one or two tabs) into the upper fascia.
protective connector on the bumper beam.
2. Working your way outward, engage the tabs into the
2. Remove plug from radar sensor and install in protecslots on one side of the vehicle.
tive connector.
3. Return to the center of the vehicle and repeat Step 2 to
3. Using the previously scribed marks, reinstall the radar
the opposite side of the vehicle.
sensor and bracket using the two fasteners.
STARTING AND OPERATING 455
mode by normal use of the air suspension switches. Refer
• It may be necessary to apply additional force to to “Quadra-Lift™ – If Equipped” in “Starting and Operindividual tabs to make sure they are fully engaged. ating” for further information.
• Do not use any tools to apply additional force to the When To Use 4WD LOW Range — If Equipped
NOTE:
tabs as damage to the upper and lower fascias may When off-road driving, shift to 4WD LOW for additional
result.
traction. This range should be limited to extreme situations such as deep snow, mud, or sand where additional
4. Reinstall the seven quarter turn fasteners.
low speed pulling power is needed. Vehicle speeds in
Quadra-Lift™ — If Equipped
excess of 25 mph (40 km/h) should be avoided when in
When off-roading, it is recommended that the lowest 4WD LOW range.
useable vehicle height that will clear the current obstacle
CAUTION!
or terrain be selected. The vehicle height should then be
raised as required by the changes in terrain.
Do not drive in 4WD-LOW Range on dry pavement;
The Selec-Terrain™ switch will automatically change the driveline damage may result. 4WD-LOW Range
vehicle to the optimized height based on the Selec- locks front and rear drivelines together and does not
Terrain™ switch position. The vehicle height can be allow for differential action between the front to rear
changed from the default height for each Selec-Terrain™
(Continued)
5
456 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION!
driveshafts. Driving in 4WD-LOW on pavement will
cause driveline binding; use only on wet or slippery
surfaces.
When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h). Always check water depth before entering,
as a precaution, and check all fluids afterward. Driving through water may cause damage that may not be
covered by the new vehicle limited warranty.
Driving Through Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
water, there are a number of precautions that must be Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
considered before entering the water.
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. If you must
NOTE: Your vehicle is capable of water fording in up to drive through water, try to determine the depth and the
20 inches (51 cm) of water, while crossing small rivers or bottom condition (and location of any obstacles) prior to
streams. To maintain optimal performance of your vehi- entering. Proceed with caution and maintain a steady
cle’s heating and ventilation system it is recommended to controlled speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in deep water
switch the system into recirculation mode during water to minimize wave effects.
fording.
STARTING AND OPERATING 457
transfer case) to assure the fluids have not been contamiIf the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm nated. Contaminated fluid (milky, foamy in appearance)
run-off), avoid crossing until the water level recedes should be flushed/changed as soon as possible to prevent component damage.
and/or the flow rate is reduced. If you must cross
flowing water avoid depths in excess of 9 inches (23 cm). Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
The flowing water can erode the streambed, causing your
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for additional
vehicle to sink into deeper water. Determine exit point(s)
control at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low
that are downstream of your entry point to allow for
gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW if necessary.
drifting.
Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation” in “Starting and
Standing Water
Operating” for further information. Do not shift to a
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 20 inches lower gear than necessary to maintain forward motion.
(51 cm), and reduce speed appropriately to minimize Over-revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction
wave effects. Maximum speed in 20 inches (51 cm) of will be lost.
Flowing Water
water is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Maintenance
After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle
fluids and lubricants (engine oil, transmission oil, axle,
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads, because engine braking may cause skidding and loss of
control.
5
458 STARTING AND OPERATING
Hill Climbing
NOTE: Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the
conditions at the crest and/or on the other side.
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission to a
lower gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW. Use
first gear and 4WD LOW for very steep hills.
If you stall or begin to lose forward motion while
climbing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop
and immediately apply the brakes. Restart the engine,
and shift into REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill,
allowing the compression braking of the engine to help
regulate your speed. If the brakes are required to control
vehicle speed, apply them lightly and avoid locking or
skidding the tires.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls, you lose forward motion, or
cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade,
never attempt to turn around. To do so may result in
tipping and rolling the vehicle. Always back carefully straight down a hill in REVERSE gear. Never
back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the brake.
Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill always
drive straight up or down.
If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a
hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain forward motion
by turning the front wheels slowly. This may provide a
fresh “bite” into the surface and will usually provide
traction to complete the climb.
STARTING AND OPERATING 459
always a good idea to check for damage. That way you
can get any problems taken care of right away and have
When descending mountains or hills, use Hill Descent or
your vehicle ready when you need it.
Selec-Speed Control to avoid repeated heavy braking.
If not equipped with Hill Descent or Selec-Speed Control • Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
use the following procedure:
exhaust system for damage.
Shift the transmission into a low gear, and the transfer
case into 4WD LOW range. Let the vehicle go slowly • Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
required.
down the hill with all four wheels turning against engine
compression drag. This will permit you to control the • Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
vehicle speed and direction.
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking
values specified in the Service Manual.
can cause brake fade with loss of braking control. Avoid
repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmis- • Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
sion whenever possible.
things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage
Traction Downhill
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is
to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and
propeller shafts.
5
460 STARTING AND OPERATING
• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or POWER STEERING
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake
3.6L Engine
rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected
Your vehicle is equipped with an electro-hydraulic power
and cleaned as soon as possible.
steering system that will give you good vehicle response
and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces.
WARNING!
The system will vary its assist to provide light efforts
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause while parking and good feel while driving. If the electroexcessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might hydraulic power steering system experiences a fault that
not have full braking power when you need it to prevents it from providing power steering assist, then the
prevent a collision. If you have been operating your system will provide mechanical steering capability.
vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked
and cleaned as necessary.
• If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a
wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will
correct the situation.
STARTING AND OPERATING 461
CAUTION!
Extreme steering maneuvers may cause the electrically driven pump to reduce or stop power steering
assistance in order to prevent damage to the system.
Normal operation will resume once the system is
allowed to cool.
over temperature condition in the power steering system.
You will lose power steering assistance momentarily
until the over temperature condition no longer exists.
Once driving conditions are safe, then pull over and let
vehicle idle for a few moments until the light turns off.
Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING” message • Even if power steering assistance is no longer operaand a flashing icon are displayed on the DID
tional, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
screen, it indicates that the vehicle needs to be
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
taken to the dealer for service. It is likely the
steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds
vehicle has lost power steering assistance. Refer to
and during parking maneuvers.
“Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
service.
If the “POWER STEERING HOT” message and an icon
are displayed on the DID screen, it indicates that extreme
steering maneuvers may have occurred, which caused an
5
462 STARTING AND OPERATING
5.7L Engine
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
does not in any way damage the steering system.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
STARTING AND OPERATING 463
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
5
464 STARTING AND OPERATING
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINE ONLY —
IF EQUIPPED
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting
off four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load
and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no
driver inputs or additional driving skills required.
NOTE: This system may take some time to return to full
functionality after a battery disconnect.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
Parking Brake
brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
PARK position.
switch in the ON position, the “Brake” Warning Light in
The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower the instrument cluster will illuminate.
left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the park
brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To release the
parking brake, press the park brake pedal a second time
and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage.
STARTING AND OPERATING 465
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake” Warning Light will
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
(Continued)
5
466 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the “OFF” mode, remove the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the
vehicle.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
If the “Brake” Warning Light remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
STARTING AND OPERATING 467
BRAKE SYSTEM
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake
systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses
normal capability, the remaining system will still function. However, there will be some loss of overall braking
effectiveness. You may notice increased pedal travel
during application, greater pedal force required to slow
or stop, and potential activation of the “Brake System
Warning Light.”
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that includes the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), Brake
Assist System (BAS), Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM),
and Electronic Stability Control (ESC). All five of these
systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and
control in various driving conditions.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine off) the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
Also, your vehicle may be equipped with Trailer Sway
Control (TSC), Hill Start Assist (HSA), Ready Alert Braking
(RAB), Rain Brake Support (RBS) and, if it has four-wheel
drive with the MP 3023 two-speed transfer case, Hill
Descent Control (HDC), Selec Speed Control (SSC).
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designed to aid the
driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse
braking conditions. The system operates with a separate
5
468 STARTING AND OPERATING
computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent The Anti-Lock Brake System pump motor runs during
wheel lock-up and help avoid skidding on slippery the self-test, and during an ABS stop, to provide the
surfaces.
regulated hydraulic pressure. The motor pump makes a
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and low humming noise during operation; this is normal.
type, and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
WARNING!
Significant over or underinflation of tires, or mixing
sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to loss
of braking effectiveness.
The Anti-Lock Brake System conducts a low speed selftest at about 12 mph (20 km/h). If for any reason your
foot is on the brake when the vehicle reaches 12 mph
(20 km/h), this check will be delayed until 25 mph
(40 km/h).
WARNING!
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can they increase braking or steering
efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of
the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 469
WARNING! (Continued)
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
CAUTION!
The Anti-Lock Brake System is subject to possible
detrimental effects of electronic interference caused
by improperly installed aftermarket radios or mobile
telephones.
NOTE: During severe braking conditions, a pulsing sensation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard. This
is normal, indicating that the Anti-Lock Brake System is
functioning.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability.
A feature of the TCS system, Brake Limited Differential
(BLD), functions similar to a limited-slip differential and
controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel
on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This
will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. This feature remains active even if
5
470 STARTING AND OPERATING
ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this section for further
information.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence (do not
“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
• The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions.
• The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
STARTING AND OPERATING 471
applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or
evasive driving maneuvers.
WARNING! (Continued)
or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERMequipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring
during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It cannot
prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as road Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or
This system enhances directional control and stability of
other vehicles.
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
WARNING!
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condi- counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. Entions, and driving conditions, influence the chance gine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot maintain the desired path.
prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
(Continued)
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
5
472 STARTING AND OPERATING
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
understeer condition.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
WARNING!
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent collisions.
The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety
of others.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” located in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon
as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes
active. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” also flashes when the TCS is active. If the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash
during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply
as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed
and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
The ESC system has two available operating modes in
4WD HIGH range and two-wheel drive vehicles, and one
operating mode in 4WD LOW range.
STARTING AND OPERATING 473
features of ESC function normally. This mode is intended
to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand, or gravel
conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would norOn
mally allow is required to gain traction. To turn ESC on
This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 4WD HIGH again, momentarily press the “ESC OFF” switch. This
range and in two-wheel drive vehicles. Whenever the will restore the normal “ESC On” mode of operation.
vehicle is started or the transfer case (if equipped) is
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
shifted from 4WD LOW range or NEUTRAL back to
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand, or
4WD HIGH range, the ESC system will be in this “On”
mode. This mode should be used for most driving gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
mode by pressing the “ESC OFF” switch. Once the
situations. ESC should only be turned to “Partial Off”
situation requiring ESC to be switched to the “Partial
mode for specific reasons as noted below.
Off” mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momenPartial Off
tarily pressing the “ESC OFF” switch. This may be done
while the vehicle is in motion.
This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the “ESC
OFF” switch. When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS
portion of ESC, except for the BLD feature described in
the TCS section, has been disabled and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. All other stability
High Range (Four-Wheel Drive Models) Or
Two-Wheel Drive Models
5
474 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality
of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section), has been disabled and
the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated.
When in “Partial Off” mode, the engine power
reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced.
• Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when the
ESC system is in the 'Partial Off' mode.
4WD HIGH range or NEUTRAL to 4WD LOW range, the
ESC system will be in the “Partial Off” mode.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
actions to attempt to stop the sway. The system may
reduce engine power and apply the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to counteract the sway of the trailer. TSC
will become active automatically once an excessively
swaying trailer is recognized. Note that TSC cannot stop
all trailers from swaying. Always use caution when
towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue weight
recommendations. Refer to “Trailer Towing” in this sec4WD Low Range
tion for further information. When TSC is functioning,
Partial Off
the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will
This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 4WD LOW flash, the engine power may be reduced and you may
range. Whenever the vehicle is started in 4WD LOW feel the brakes being applied to individual wheels to
range, or the transfer case (if equipped) is shifted from attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled
when the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
STARTING AND OPERATING 475
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the
trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the
brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle
during this short period of time, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
system will release brake pressure in proportion to the
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in
the intended direction of travel.
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• Vehicle must be stopped.
• Vehicle must be on a 6% (approximate) grade or
greater hill.
• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when
the activation criteria have been met. The system will not
activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK.
5
476 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded
vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when the system
will not activate and slight rolling may occur. This
could cause a collision with another vehicle or object.
Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, your trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, when the
brake pedal is released, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a
hill and this could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object behind you. In order to avoid
rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration,
manually activate the trailer brake prior to releasing the brake pedal. Always remember the driver is
responsible for braking the vehicle.
Towing With HSA
HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade
when pulling a trailer.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 477
WARNING! (Continued)
• HSA is not a parking brake. If you stop the vehicle
on a hill without putting the transmission in PARK
and using the parking brake, it will roll down the
hill and could cause a collision with another vehicle or object. Always remember to use the parking brake while parking on a hill, and that the
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by
the driver. When the throttle is released very quickly,
Ready Alert Braking applies a small amount of brake
pressure. This brake pressure will not be noticed by the
driver. The brake system uses this brake pressure to allow
a fast brake response if the driver applies the brakes.
Rain Brake Support — If Equipped
Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance
in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small
HSA Off
amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup
If you wish to turn off the HSA system, it can be done on the front brake rotors. It only functions when the
using the Uconnect® Access Settings. Refer to windshield wipers are in the LO or HI mode, it does not
“Uconnect® Access Settings” in “Understanding Your function in the intermittent mode. When Rain Brake
Support is active, there is no notification to the driver and
Instrument Panel” for further information.
no driver interaction is required.
Ready Alert Braking — If Equipped
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to
reach full braking during emergency braking situations.
It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may
5
478 STARTING AND OPERATING
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
(Four-Wheel Drive Models With MP3023
Two-Speed Transfer Case Only)
descending hills during various driving situations. HDC
controls vehicle speed by actively controlling the brakes.
HDC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate).
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation
conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding
with brake or throttle application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling
vehicle speed).
Enabling HDC
HDC is enabled by pressing the HDC switch, but the
following conditions must also be met to enable HDC:
Hill Descent Control Switch
• Driveline is in 4WD Low Range
HDC is intended for low speed off road driving while in • Vehicle speed is below 5mph (8 km/h)
4WD Low Range. HDC maintains vehicle speed while • Parking brake is released
STARTING AND OPERATING 479
• Driver door is closed
• 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
Once HDC is enabled it will activate automatically if
driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude (greater
than approximately 8%). The set speed for HDC is
selectable by the driver, and can be adjusted by using the
paddle shifter. The following summarizes the HDC set
speeds:
• 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
Activating HDC
• 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
• 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
• 8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
NOTE:
• P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but will not • During HDC the +/- paddle shifter input is used for
HDC target speed selection and will put the transmisactivate.
sion into ERS but will not affect the gear chosen by the
• R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
transmission unless in Driver Override. During HDC
the transmission will shift appropriately for the driver• N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
selected set speed and corresponding driving condi• 1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
tions.
• 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
• HDC performance is influenced by the Terrain Select
mode. This difference may be notable to the driver and
may be perceived as a varying level of aggressiveness.
5
480 STARTING AND OPERATING
Driver Override:
The driver may override HDC activation with throttle or
brake application at any time. While in driver override
the transmission will be in ERS which is a top gear limiter
and the vehicle will shift from 1st through the gear that is
being displayed.
Deactivating HDC
Disabling HDC
HDC will deactivate and be disabled if any of the
following conditions occur:
• The driver presses the HDC switch.
• The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low Range.
•
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any of
•
the following conditions occur:
•
• Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle or brake
application.
•
• Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but remains
below 40 mph (64 km/h).
• Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient magnitude (less than approximately 8%), is on level ground,
or is on an uphill grade.
• Vehicle is shifted to park.
The parking brake is applied.
Driver door opens.
The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph (32 km/h)
for greater than 70 seconds.
The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (64 km/h)
(HDC exits immediately).
STARTING AND OPERATING 481
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash when HDC
deactivates due to overheated brakes. The flashing will
The instrument cluster has a HDC icon and a HDC
stop and HDC will activate again once the brakes have
switch which has an LED which offers feedback to the
cooled sufficiently.
driver about the state HDC is in.
Feedback to the driver:
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and
remain on solid when HDC is enabled or activated.
This is the normal operating condition for HDC.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when the driver presses the
HDC switch but enable conditions are not met.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when HDC deactivates due to
excess speed.
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver
must remain attentive to the driving conditions and
is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
5
482 STARTING AND OPERATING
Selec Speed Control (SSC) — If Equipped
(Four-Wheel Drive Models With MP3023
Two-Speed Transfer Case Only)
SSC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate)
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation
conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding
with brake or throttle application)
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling
vehicle speed)
Enabling SSC
SSC is enabled by pressing the SSC switch, but the
following conditions must also be met to enable SSC:
• Driveline is in 4WD Low Range
Selec Speed Control Switch
• Vehicle speed is below 5mph (8 km/h)
• Parking brake is released
SSC is intended for off road driving in 4WD Low Range
• Driver door is closed
only. SSC maintains vehicle speed by actively controlling
engine torque and brakes.
• Driver is not applying throttle
STARTING AND OPERATING 483
Activating SSC
• 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
Once SSC is enabled it will activate automatically once • 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
the following conditions are met:
• 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
• Driver releases throttle
• 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
• Driver releases brake
• 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
• Transmission is in any selection other than P
• 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
• Vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h)
• 8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
The set speed for SSC is selectable by the driver, and can
be adjusted by using the paddle shifter’s. The following NOTE:
summarizes the SSC set speeds:
• During SSC the +/- paddle shifter input is used for
SSC target speed selection and will put the transmis• P = No set speed. SSC may be enabled but will not
sion into ERS but will not affect the gear chosen by the
activate.
transmission unless in Driver Override. During SSC
• R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
the transmission will shift appropriately for the driverselected set speed and corresponding driving condi• N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
tions.
• 1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
5
484 STARTING AND OPERATING
• SSC performance is influenced by the Terrain Select Disabling SSC
mode. This difference may be notable to the driver and
SSC will deactivate and be disabled if any of the followmay be perceived as a varying level of aggressiveness.
ing conditions occur:
Driver Override:
• The driver presses the SSC switch
The driver may override SSC activation with throttle or
brake application at any time. While in driver override • The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low Range.
the transmission will be in ERS which is a top gear limiter • The parking brake is applied.
and the vehicle will shift from 1st through whichever
• Driver door opens.
gear is displayed.
Deactivating SSC
SSC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the
following conditions occur:
• The vehicle is driven faster than 20 mph (32 km/h) for
longer than 70 seconds.
• The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (64 km/h) (
SSC exits immediately)
• Driver overrides SSC set speed with throttle or brake
application.
• Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but remains
below 40 mph (64 km/h).
• Vehicle is shifted to park.
STARTING AND OPERATING 485
Feedback to the driver:
The instrument cluster has an SSC icon and the SSC
switch has an LED which offers feedback to the driver
about the state SSC is in.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and
remain on solid when SSC is enabled or activated. This
is the normal operating condition for SSC.
WARNING!
SSC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling vehicle speed when driving in off road conditions. The driver must remain attentive to the driving
conditions and is responsible for maintaining a safe
vehicle speed.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
ESC OFF Indicator Light
seconds then extinguish when the driver presses the
SSC switch but enable conditions are not met.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
seconds then extinguish when SSC deactivates due to
when the ignition switch is cycled to the ON/
excess speed.
RUN position. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
5
486 STARTING AND OPERATING
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at NOTE:
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on modiagnosed and corrected.
mentarily each time the ignition switch is placed in the
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (loON/RUN position.
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
• Each time the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
position, the ESC system will be ON even if it was
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
cycled off previously, except for when the vehicle is
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
started while in 4L Range.
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little • The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially
off or full off.
STARTING AND OPERATING 487
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
NOTE:
Tire Markings
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter #P# is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
5
488 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure comstandards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
'....blank....' = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
STARTING AND OPERATING 489
EXAMPLE:
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
– #R# means radial construction, or
– #D# means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
5
490 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL)
tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire
STARTING AND OPERATING 491
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
5
492 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
STARTING AND OPERATING 493
Term
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
5
494 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
STARTING AND OPERATING 495
Tire And Loading Information Placard
5
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
496 STARTING AND OPERATING
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
spare tires.
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
Loading
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pasGAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 497
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE:
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The followbe five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) =
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
650 lbs [295 kg]).
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
• For the following example, the combined weight of
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
capacity calculated in step 4.
(392 kg).
5
498 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING AND OPERATING 499
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in overheating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Overinflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
5
500 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability need for earlier tire replacement.
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
NOTE:
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause ride.
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
Tire Inflation Pressures
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
vehicle to drift left or right.
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
STARTING AND OPERATING 501
At least once a month:
1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours.
The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidepocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
wall.
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are under- Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
inflated.
temperature changes.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
CAUTION!
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, althe winter.
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
which could damage the valve stem.
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure outside temperature condition.
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
5
502 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle Radial Ply Tires
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original
WARNING!
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operatCombining radial ply tires with other types of tires
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
STARTING AND OPERATING 503
Tire Repair
Tire Types
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it All Season Tires — If Equipped
meets the following criteria:
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring,
summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary be• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
tween different all season tires. All season tires can be
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
• The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm). failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for winter or cold
driving conditions. Install winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if
roads are covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an authorized dealer.
5
504 STARTING AND OPERATING
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury
or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates
the possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires
only in sets of four; failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
STARTING AND OPERATING 505
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in
“What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
CAUTION!
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the compact or limited-use temporary spare installed.
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire Damage to the vehicle may result.
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immedi- Wheel — If Equipped
ately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat mode. equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more infor- of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
mation.
5
506 STARTING AND OPERATING
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
tire rotation pattern.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
WARNING!
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. only. With these spares, do not drive more than
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/ tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
80D18 103M.
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip- spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
STARTING AND OPERATING 507
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
first opportunity.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
WARNING!
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Inspare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
stallation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
first opportunity.
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
5
508 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Spinning
Tread Wear Indicators
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or to help you in determining when your tires should be
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop- replaced.
ping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
STARTING AND OPERATING 509
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread • Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and summer tires typically have a reduced
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle mainbecomes a 1/16 of an inch (2 mm). When the tread is
tenance schedule is highly recommended.
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
WARNING!
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
• Distance driven.
5
510 STARTING AND OPERATING
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicator.” Refer to the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Information section of this
manual for more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 511
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
5
512 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
against damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
• Install on Rear Tires Only
• Due to limited clearance, Thule XG-12 Pro or equivalent is recommended on P245/70/R17, P265/60R18 or
265/50R20 tires.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove
the damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 513
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to
a smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
NOTE: The premium Tire Pressure Monitor System will
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at automatically locate the pressure values displayed in the
different loads and perform different steering, handling, correct vehicle position following a tire rotation.
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at The suggested rotation method is the “forward-cross”
unequal rates.
shown in the following diagram.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off-Road
5
514 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn
the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
recommended cold tire placard pressure.
Tire Rotation
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1
psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three-hour period. Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for information on
how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire
pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is
normal and there should be no adjustment for this
increased pressure.
STARTING AND OPERATING 515
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning
threshold for any reason, including low temperature
effects, or natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended
cold tire placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure
warning has been illuminated, the tire pressure must be
increased to the recommended cold tire pressure in order
for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be
turned off. The system will automatically update and the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish
once the updated tire pressures have been received. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle has a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) tire placard pressure
of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle
may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28
psi (193 kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will still be ON. In this situation, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the
tires have been inflated to the vehicle’s recommended
cold tire pressure value.
5
516 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have
your sensor function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor.
(Continued)
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
STARTING AND OPERATING 517
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the Receiver Module.
stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even
if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
Tire Pressure Monitor Display
technology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors to NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to regularly
check the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain
the proper pressure.
5
518 STARTING AND OPERATING
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) consists of the value(s) with the low tire(s) displayed in a different color.
Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Underfollowing components:
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• Receiver Module
NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
in PSI, BAR or kPa.
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,
which display in the Driver Information Display
(DID), and a graphic displaying tire pressures
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime will be activated, when one or more of the
four active road tire pressures are low. In addition, the
DID will display a #Tire Low# message, an #Inflate to
XXX# message and a graphic display of the pressure
Low Tire Pressure Monitor Display
STARTING AND OPERATING 519
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four
active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible,
and inflate the low tire(s) that is in a different color on the
graphic display to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire
pressure displayed in the #Inflate to XXX# message.
Service Tpm System Warning
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
a chime. The DID will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSNOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may TEM” message for a minimum of five seconds. This
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa) message is then followed by a graphic display, with “- -“
above the recommended cold placard pressure in order in place of the pressure value(s), indicating which Tire
Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) is not being received.
to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
The system will automatically update, the graphic dis- If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
play of the pressure value(s) will return to its original providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
color and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
extinguish once the updated tire pressure(s) have been Light will no longer flash, the #SERVICE TPM SYSTEM#
received. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
5
520 STARTING AND OPERATING
message will not be present, and a pressure value will be The DID will also display a #SERVICE TPM SYSTEM#
displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can occur by message for a minimum of five seconds when a system
any of the following:
fault is detected possibly related to an incorrect sensor
location fault. In this case, the #SERVICE TPM SYSTEM#
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
message is then followed by a graphic display, with
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the
pressure values still shown. This indicates the pressure
TPM sensors.
values are still being received from the TPM Sensors but
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting they may not be located in the correct vehicle position.
that affects radio wave signals.
However, the system still needs to be serviced as long as
the #SERVICE TPM SYSTEM# message exists.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
STARTING AND OPERATING 521
NOTE: There is no tire pressure monitoring sensor in the
spare tire. The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire
pressure. If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
upon the next ignition switch cycle, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will remain ON, a chime will
sound, and the DID will still display a pressure value in
the different color graphic display and an #Inflate to XXX
kPa# message will be displayed. After driving the vehicle
for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addition, the
DID will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM# message for
five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value. For each subsequent ignition switch
cycle, a chime will sound, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid, and the DID will display a #SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM# message for five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value. Once you
repair or replace the original road tire, and reinstall it on
the vehicle in place of the spare tire, the TPMS will
update automatically.
In addition, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
will turn OFF and the graphic in the DID will display a
new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no
tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in
any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
5
522 STARTING AND OPERATING
General Information
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and 3.6L Engine — If Equipped
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
This engine is designed to meet all emis• This device may not cause harmful interference.
sions regulations and provide excellent
fuel economy and performance when us• This device must accept any interference received,
ing high-quality unleaded “regular” gasoincluding interference that may cause undesired opline having an octane rating of 87. The use
eration.
of higher octane premium gasoline will not provide any
The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the follow- benefit over regular gasoline in these engines.
ing licenses:
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
United States
MRXMERCTX1
high engine speeds can cause damage and immediate
Canada
2546A-MERCTX1
service is required.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle. Engine damage resulting
STARTING AND OPERATING 523
from operating with a heavy spark knock may void or Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
not be covered by the New Vehicle Warranty.
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consid5.7L Engine — If Equipped
ering service for the vehicle.
This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfactory
fuel economy and performance when using
high-quality unleaded gasoline having an
octane range of 87 to 89. Use of 89 octane for
optimum performance is recommended. The use of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will not provide
any benefit over plus gasoline in these engines.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasoline contain oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide imLight spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to proved performance and durability of engine and fuel
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at system components.
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required. Engine damage resulting from operating with a
heavy spark knock may void or not be covered by the
new vehicle warranty.
5
524 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy- Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasogenates such as ethanol.
line containing up to 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
blends may result in starting and drivability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they should
clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than
10% ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% ethanol are not
the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not
be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
• Poor engine performance.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
STARTING AND OPERATING 525
MMT In Gasoline
Materials Added To Fuel
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT)
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
fuel.
5
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
(Continued)
526 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 527
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label can
operate on E-85.
FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) — IF
EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel vehicles
only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique fuel filler
door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded Gasoline
Only. This section only covers those subjects that are
unique to these vehicles. Please refer to the other sections
of this manual for information on features that are common
between Flexible Fuel and gasoline-only powered vehicles.
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% ethanol and 15%
unleaded gasoline.
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking materials lit or products that can cause spark in or
near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube
cap (gas cap) or filling the tank. Do not use E-85 as a
cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame.
5
528 STARTING AND OPERATING
Fuel Requirements
NOTE:
If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on • Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With
unleaded gasoline with any octane rating, or solely E-85
non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, hard starting and
fuel, or any mixture of these fuels.
rough idle following start up may be experienced even
if the above recommendations are followed, especially
For best results, avoid fueling patterns alternating
when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
between E-85 and unleaded gasoline.
• Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your
• Add 5 gallons (19 Liters) or more when refueling.
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline
• Drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at
additive, such as MOPAR® Injector Cleanup or
least 5 miles (8 km).
Techron may be used.
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
starting and/or driveability problems during warm up. Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
When switching fuel types:
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formulated engine oils. These special requirements are included
in MOPAR® engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
STARTING AND OPERATING 529
Chrysler Specification MS-6395. It is recommended that
engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Material Standard MS-6395 be used. MS-6395
contains additional requirements, developed during extensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to
FCA US LLC engines.
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter
than gasoline, an increase in fuel consumption will be
experienced. The miles per gallon (mpg)/Kilometers per
liter and the driving range will decrease by approximately 30%, compared to gasoline operation.
Starting
Replacement Parts
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
All fuel and engine components in your Flexible Fuel
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the Vehicle (FFV) are designed to be compatible with ethanol.
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), an increase in the time Ethanol compatible service components are required.
it takes for your engine to start may be experienced, and
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
CAUTION!
until the engine is fully warmed up. These issues may be
improved with the use of seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel.
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) may compatible components can damage your vehicle.
improve engine start time when using E-85 fuel when the
ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).
5
530 STARTING AND OPERATING
Maintenance
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect drivability.
ADDING FUEL
1. Press the fuel filler door release switch (located under
the headlamp switch).
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
2. Open the fuel filler door.
STARTING AND OPERATING 531
3. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the
pipe seals the system.
4. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe, the
nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while refueling.
5. Fill the vehicle with fuel, when the fuel nozzle “clicks”
or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
6. Wait 5 seconds before removing the fuel nozzle to
allow fuel to drain from nozzle.
Fuel Filler Door
NOTE: In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the
fuel door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the
fuel door to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel
door using the inside release button. Do not pry on the
door.
7. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
5
532 STARTING AND OPERATING
Emergency Gas Can Refueling
• Most gas cans will not open the flapper door.
• A funnel is provided to open the flapper door to allow
emergency refueling with a gas can.
• Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storage area.
• Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as the fuel
nozzle.
• Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper door
open.
• Pour fuel into funnel opening.
• Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior to
putting back in the spare tire storage area.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the “Malfunction Indicator
Light” to turn on.
• A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the
ground while filling.
STARTING AND OPERATING 533
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel
filler door emergency release.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Push the inboard edge of the left storage bin to the
center, this will pop up the outboard edge.
3. Grab popped up outboard edge with other hand to
disengage snaps.
4. Remove the storage bin.
Release Cable
5. Pull the release cable to open the fuel door, push the
release cable back to the home position to re-seat the NOTE: If the fuel door does not latch after the manual
fuel door latch to the closed position.
release cable has been activated, the actuator latch should
be manually returned to the closed position.
5
534 STARTING AND OPERATING
VEHICLE LOADING
Payload
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the
driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for inGross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehiThe GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle cle’s GVWR.
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
STARTING AND OPERATING 535
Tire Size
Loading
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded
into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are
determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial
scale before any occupants or cargo are added.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.
The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should
then be determined separately to be sure that the load is
properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the
front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is
within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier
items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed
equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.
5
536 STARTING AND OPERATING
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
the brakes operate.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
TRAILER TOWING
Certification Label” in “Starting And Operating” for
In this section you will find safety tips and information further information.
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
STARTING AND OPERATING 537
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tem- and trailer when weighed in combination.
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its #loaded and
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
ready for operation# condition.
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further
WARNING!
information.
If the gross trailer weight is 5,000 lbs (2 267 kg) or
more, it is mandatory to use a weight-distributing
hitch to ensure stable handling of your vehicle. If
you use a standard weight-carrying hitch, you could
lose control of your vehicle and cause a collision.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
5
538 STARTING AND OPERATING
If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to
hitch ball by the trailer. The recommended tongue weight
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
is 10% to 15% of the vehicle’s GTW for a conventional
hitch. You must consider this as part of the load on your Weight-Carrying Hitch
vehicle.
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
Frontal Area
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
Trailer Sway Control
trailers.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping
link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and
the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen
any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
STARTING AND OPERATING 539
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your
hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information.
5
540 STARTING AND OPERATING
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
The following chart provides the industry standard for correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
Trailer Hitch Classification
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer
Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 541
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer
weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain:
Engine
3.6L
3.6L
5.7L
5.7L
Model
4x2
4x4
4x2
4x4
Refer to
Max. GTW (Gross
Trailer Wt.)
55 sq ft (5.11 sq m)
6,200 lbs (2 812 kg)
55 sq ft (5.11 sq m)
6,200 lbs (2 812 kg)
55 sq ft (5.11 sq m)
7,400 lbs (3 357 kg)
55 sq ft (5.11 sq m)
7,200 lbs (3 266 kg)
local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
Frontal Area
Max. Trailer Tongue
Wt. (See Note)
620 lbs (281 kg)
620 lbs (281 kg)
740 lbs (336 kg)
720 lbs (327 kg)
5
542 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as NOTE: Use a suitable tool such as a coin in the slot of the
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and locking retainer if needed for added leverage.
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire
and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire Safety
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information. The addition of passengers and cargo may
require reducing trailer tongue load and Gross Trailer
Weight (GTW). Redistributing cargo (to the trailer) may
be necessary to avoid exceeding Rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) of 3,700 lbs (1 678 kg).
Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal (Summit
Models) — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a trailer hitch receiver cover, this must be removed to access the trailer
hitch receiver (if equipped). This hitch receiver cover is
Hitch Receiver Cover
located at the bottom center of the rear fascia.
1 — Hitch Receiver Cover
1. Turn the two locking retainers located at the bottom of 2 — Locking Retainers
the hitch receiver cover a 1/4 turn counterclockwise.
STARTING AND OPERATING 543
2. Pull the bottom of the cover outward (towards you), To reinstall the hitch receiver cover after towing repeat
pull downwards to disengage the tabs located at the the procedure in reverse order.
top of the hitch receiver cover.
NOTE: Be sure to engage all tabs of the hitch receiver
cover in the bumper fascia prior to installation.
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% of the weight in the front
of the trailer. This places 10% of the GTW on the tow
hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or
heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely
side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle
and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the
cause of many trailer collisions. Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your trailer hitch.
Hitch Receiver Cover
5
544 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to “Tire Safety Information/Tire and Loading Information Placard” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components, the following guidelines are recommended.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle
• The weight of the driver and all passengers
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 545
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Maintenance
Schedule.” Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the
proper maintenance intervals. When towing a trailer,
never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
(Continued)
(Continued)
5
546 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure
the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always,
block or 'chock' the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
Towing Requirements — Tires
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Operating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage.
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Starting And Operating” for the
proper inspection procedure.
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Operating” for the proper
tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a
higher load carrying capacity will not increase the
vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.
STARTING AND OPERATING 547
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have an
accident.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in an
accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
5
548 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
1,653 lbs (750 kg).
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and sevenpin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
1 — Female Pins
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle 2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
Four-Pin Connector
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
STARTING AND OPERATING 549
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer up in an area away from heavy
traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid
frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent
shifting does occur while in DRIVE, you can use the
Paddle Shift switches to manually select a lower gear.
Seven-Pin Connector
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Battery
Backup Lamps
Right Stop/Turn
Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions, will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
5
550 STARTING AND OPERATING
Paddle Shift Mode
Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped
• When using the Paddle Shift switches, select the • Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
highest gear that allows for adequate performance and
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “5” if
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
the desired speed can be maintained. Choose “4” or
you can get back to cruising speed.
“3” if needed to maintain the desired speed.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
• To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
maximize fuel efficiency.
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as necessary to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to Cooling System
a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road To reduce potential for engine and transmission overconditions allow.
heating, take the following actions:
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
STARTING AND OPERATING 551
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
WARNING!
Do not add a snow plow, winches, or any other
aftermarket equipment to the front of your vehicle.
This could adversely affect the functioning of the
airbag system and you could be injured.
SNOW PLOW
Snow plows, winches, and other aftermarket equipment
should not be added to the front end of your vehicle. The
airbag crash sensors may be affected by the change in the
front end structure. The airbags could deploy unexpectedly or could fail to deploy during a collision.
5
552 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition
Wheels OFF the
Ground
Two-Wheel Drive
Models
Flat Tow
NONE
NOT ALLOWED
Four-Wheel Drive
Models Without
4–LO Range
NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow
Front
Rear
ALL
NOT ALLOWED
OK
OK
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
On Trailer
Four-Wheel Drive
Models With 4–LO
Range
See Instructions
• Transmission in
PARK
• Transfer case in
NEUTRAL (N)
• Tow in forward
direction
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
STARTING AND OPERATING 553
NOTE:
Recreational Towing – Two-Wheel Drive Models
• When recreationally towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state
and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional
details.
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain
will result.
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is
allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the ground.
• Vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift™ must be placed This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle
in Transport Mode before tying them down (from the trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
body) on a trailer or flatbed truck. Refer to “Quadra- 1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
Lift™ – If Equipped” in “Starting and Operating” for
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
more information. If the vehicle cannot be placed in
Transport mode (for example, engine will not run), 2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
tie-downs must be fastened to the axles (not to the 3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Shift the transmission
body). Failure to follow these instructions may cause
into PARK.
fault codes to be set and/or cause loss of proper
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
tie-down tension.
5. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
5
554 STARTING AND OPERATING
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for towing, to secure the front wheels in the straight position.
CAUTION!
Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will
cause severe transmission damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Recreational Towing — Quadra–Trac II®
/Quadra–Drive® II Four-Wheel Drive Models
The transfer case must be shifted into NEUTRAL (N) and
the transmission must be in PARK for recreational towing. The NEUTRAL (N) selection button is adjacent to the
transfer case selector switch. Shifts into and out of
Recreational towing is not allowed. These models do
transfer case NEUTRAL (N) can take place with the
not have a NEUTRAL (N) position in the transfer case.
selector switch in any mode position.
NOTE: This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or
vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the
ground.
Recreational Towing – Quadra-Trac I®
(Single-Speed Transfer Case) Four-Wheel Drive
Models
STARTING AND OPERATING 555
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Towing with
only one set of wheels on the ground (front or rear)
will cause severe transmission and/or transfer case
damage. Tow with all four wheels either ON the
ground, or OFF the ground (using a vehicle trailer).
• Tow only in a forward direction. Towing this vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to the
transfer case.
• The transmission must be in PARK for recreational
towing.
• Before recreational towing, perform the procedure
outlined under “Shifting into NEUTRAL (N)” to be
certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL
(N). Otherwise, internal damage will result.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or
transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar
on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be
damaged.
(Continued)
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging
the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N)
(Continued)
5
556 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle
to roll, even if the transmission is in PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
4. If vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift™ air suspension, ensure the vehicle is set to Normal Ride Height.
5. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, press and hold
the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button (loUse the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
cated by the selector switch) for four seconds. The
recreational towing.
light behind the N symbol will blink, indicating shift
in progress. The light will stop blinking (stay on solid)
when the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is complete. A “FOUR
CAUTION!
WHEEL DRIVE SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL” message will
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
appear in the Driver Information Display (DID). Refer
the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N) before
to “Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Underrecreational towing to prevent damage to internal
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further informaparts.
tion.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, with the engine
running.
STARTING AND OPERATING 557
9. Shift the transmission back into NEUTRAL.
10. With the transmission and transfer case in NEUTRAL, press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP
button until the engine turns off. Turning the engine
off will automatically place the transmission in
PARK.
11. Press the ENGINE STOP/START button again (without pressing the brake pedal), if needed, to turn the
ignition switch to the OFF position.
12. Firmly apply the parking brake.
NEUTRAL (N) Switch
6. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL (N)
light stays on, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
8. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure
that there is no vehicle movement.
13. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable
tow bar.
14. Release the parking brake.
5
558 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
• Steps 1 through 4 are requirements that must be met
before pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must • If the vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift™ air
continue to be met until the shift has been completed.
suspension, the engine should be started and left
If any of these requirements are not met before pressrunning for a minimum of 60 seconds (with all the
ing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met
doors closed) at least once every 24 hours. This process
during the shift, then the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light
allows the air suspension to adjust the vehicle’s ride
will flash continuously until all requirements are met
height to compensate for temperature effects.
or until the NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position
for a shift to take place and for the position indicator
lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the
ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
STARTING AND OPERATING 559
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
5
3. Start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
NEUTRAL (N) Switch
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, press and hold
7. When the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns off,
the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button (lorelease the NEUTRAL (N) button. After the NEUcated by the selector switch) for one second.
TRAL (N) button has been released, the transfer case
will shift to the position indicated by the selector
switch.
560 STARTING AND OPERATING
8. Shift the transmission into PARK. Turn the engine NOTE:
OFF.
• Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met
9. Release the brake pedal.
before pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must
continue to be met until the shift has been completed.
10. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
If any of these requirements are not met before press11. Start the engine.
ing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met
during the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will
12. Press and hold the brake pedal.
flash continuously until all requirements are met or
13. Release the parking brake.
until the NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
14. Shift the transmission into DRIVE, release the brake • The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position
pedal, and check that the vehicle operates normally.
for a shift to take place and for the position indicator
lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the
ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
! HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .562 ! JUMP-STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
! IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .562
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
! WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
! JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . .565
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
! FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .580
! EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED . .582
! MANUAL PARK RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
! TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .586
▫ Without The Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568
▫ Two-Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
▫ Four-Wheel Drive Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
6
562 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
switch bank just above the climate controls.
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning • On the highways — slow down.
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc- • In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle speed.
traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
an impending overheat condition:
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the • You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers
engine cooling system.
may wear down your battery.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 563
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT
(H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous
chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
130 Ft-Lbs (176 N·m)
M14 x 1.50
Lug Nut/
Bolt Socket
Size
22 mm
**Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug
nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
6
564 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Wheel Mounting Surface
Torque Patterns
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
WARNING!
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 565
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
(Continued)
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
6
566 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: The funnel for the Cap-Less Fuel System is
The scissor-type jack and tire changing tools are located located on top of the spare tire. If your vehicle is out of
fuel and an auxiliary fuel can is needed, insert the funnel
in rear cargo area, below the load floor.
into the filler neck and proceed to fill the vehicle. For
vehicles not equipped with a spare tire, the fuel filler
funnel is stored in the left storage bin under the load
floor. For more information on the Cap-Less Fuel System
refer to “Adding Fuel” in “Starting And Operating” in
this manual.
Jack Location
Spare Tire Stowage
The spare tire is stowed under the load floor in the rear
cargo area and is secured to the body with a special wing
nut.
Jack Storage Location
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 567
Preparations For Jacking
CAUTION!
Always lift or jack the vehicle from the correct
jacking points. Failure to follow this information
could cause damage to the vehicle or underbody
components.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
NOTE: To assist with changing a spare tire, the air 3. Set the parking brake.
suspension system has a feature which allows the auto4. Place the shift lever into PARK.
matic leveling to be disabled.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery surfaces.
6
568 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally Jacking Instructions
opposite of the jacking position. For
example, if changing the right front
WARNING!
tire, block the left rear wheel.
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
vehicle.
when the vehicle is being jacked.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
7. For vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift® refer to • Chock the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
“Quadra-Lift® — If Equipped” in “Starting And Opbe raised.
erating” for further information on disabling auto- • Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
matic leveling.
transmission in PARK.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 569
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
Jack Warning Label
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and tools from storage.
2. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left, one turn, while the wheel is
still on the ground.
6
570 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools.
Jacking Locations
Jack And Tool Assembly
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 571
4. For the front axle, place the jack on the body flange
just behind the front tire as indicated by the triangular
lift point symbol on the sill molding. Do not raise the
vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged.
6
Front Jacking Location
Lift Point Symbol On Sill Molding
572 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. For a rear tire, place the jack in the slot on the rear
tie-down bracket, just forward of the rear tire (as
indicated by the triangular lift point symbol on the sill
molding). Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure
the jack is fully engaged.
Rear Jacking Location
Lift Point Symbol On Sill Molding
6. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise.
Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the
surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the
spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 573
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
7. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
8. Position the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle and install
the lug nuts with the cone-shaped end toward the
wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
6
Mounting Spare Tire
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
574 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counterclockwise, and remove the jack and wheel blocks.
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
each nut has been tightened twice. For correct lug nut
torque refer to Torque Specifications in this section. If
in doubt about the correct tightness, have them
checked with a torque wrench by your authorized
dealer or at a service station.
11. Lower the jack to the fully closed position and return
Stowed Spare
it and the tools to the proper positions in the foam
13. Have the aluminum road wheel and tire repaired as
tray.
soon as possible, properly secure the spare tire with
12. Remove the small center cap and securely store the
the special wing nut torqued to 3.7 ft-lbs (5 N·m),
road wheel in the cargo area.
reinstall the jack and tool kit foam tray, and latch the
rear load floor cover.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 575
WARNING!
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
Road Tire Installation
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
4. Refer to Torque Table for proper lug nut torque.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped 5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
lug nuts.
seated against the wheel.
6
576 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump- follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in precautions.
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster Preparations For Jump-Start
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
The battery in your vehicle is located under the passenso please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
ger’s front seat. There are remote locations located under
the hood to assist in jump-starting.
JUMP-STARTING
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 577
WARNING!
Remote Battery Posts
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post (covered with protective cap)
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
NOTE: Be sure that the disconnected ends of the cables
do not touch while still connected to the other vehicle.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
6
578 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri- Jump-Starting Procedure
cal accessories.
3. Remove the protective cover over the remote positive
(+) battery post. Pull upward on the cover to remove
it.
4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
NOTE: Make sure at all times that unused ends of
jumper cables are not contacting each other or either
vehicle while making connections.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 579
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
WARNING! (Continued)
could result in personal injury. Only use the specific
ground point, do not use any other exposed metal
parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with 6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables
the discharged battery.
in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and
(Continued)
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable
from the remote negative (-) post of the discharged
vehicle.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
6
580 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
CAUTION! (Continued)
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
5. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote positive FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
(+) post of the discharged vehicle.
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
you should have the battery and charging system tested steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Push and hold the lock button on the shift
at your authorized dealer.
lever. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and
REVERSE while gently pushing the accelerator.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
(Continued)
NOTE: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for
more than two seconds, you must push the brake pedal
to engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 581
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that
will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the
wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE: Push the #ESC Off# switch (if necessary), to place
the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in #Partial
Off# mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information. Once the vehicle has been freed,
push the #ESC Off# switch again to restore #ESC On#
mode.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
6
582 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, there will be
one in the rear and two mounted on the front of the
vehicle. The rear hook will be located on the driver’s side
of the vehicle.
NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of
damage to the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle.
Chains may break, causing serious injury or death.
• Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
hooks. Tow straps may become disengaged, causing serious injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for
tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could
damage your vehicle.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 583
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
parking brake, before activating the Manual Park
Release. Activating the Manual Park Release will
allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by
the parking brake or by proper connection to a tow
vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on an
unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or
death for those in or around the vehicle.
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Open the center console and locate the Manual Park
Release cover, remove it by snapping the cover away
from the console hinges.
6
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the transmission will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead battery),
a Manual Park Release is available.
Manual Park Release Cover
584 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, push the metal
latch in towards the tether strap.
Released Position
Release Latch
4. While the metal latch is in the open position, simultaneously pull upwards on the tether strap until the lever
clicks and latches in the released position. The transmission is now out of PARK and the vehicle can be moved.
CAUTION!
Closing the armrest while the Manual Park Release is
activated may damage the Manual Park Release
mechanism, the transmission, and/or the armrest.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 585
NOTE: To prevent the vehicle from rolling unintentionally, firmly apply the parking brake.
To Disengage the Manual Park Release Lever:
1. To disengage the Manual Park Release apply tension
upward while pushing the release latch towards the
tether to unlock the lever.
6
Release Latch
2. Once the tension has been released and the lever has
been unlocked be sure it is stowed properly and locks
into position.
586 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service. If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled vehicles
may also be towed as described under “Recreational
Towing” in the “Starting and Operating” section.
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift™ must be
placed in Transport mode, before tying them down (from
the body) on a trailer or flatbed truck. Refer to the section
on Quadra-Lift™ for more information. If the vehicle
cannot be placed in Transport mode (for example, engine
Stowed Position
will not run), tie-downs must be fastened to the axles (not
NOTE: Be sure to replace the cover by snapping it back to the body). Failure to follow these instructions may
cause fault codes to be set and/or cause loss of proper
in place.
tie-down tension.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 587
Towing
Condition
Flat Tow
Wheels OFF
the Ground
NONE
Wheel Lift or
Dolly Tow
Front
Rear
ALL
Flatbed
2WD Models
4WD Models
If transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h) max speed
• 30 miles (48 km) max distance
See instructions in “Recreational Towing” under “Starting and Operating”
• Transmission in PARK
• Transfer Case in NEUTRAL
• Tow in forward direction
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
BEST METHOD
OK
BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position.
If the vehicle’s battery is discharged, refer to “Manual
Park Release” in this section for instructions on shifting
the transmission out of PARK for towing.
6
588 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
• If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the
ignition switch must be in the ACC or ON/RUN
position, not in the LOCK/OFF position.
Without The Key Fob
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the LOCK/OFF position. The only
approved method of towing without the key fob is with
a flatbed truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to
prevent damage to the vehicle.
Two-Wheel Drive Models
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission is operable, the vehicle may be towed (with rear
wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL. Refer to
#Manual Park Release# in this section for instructions
on shifting the transmission to NEUTRAL when the
engine is off.
• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles (48 km).
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than 30
miles (48 km), tow with the rear wheels OFF the ground.
Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed,
or with the front wheels raised and the rear wheels on a
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 589
towing dolly, or (when using a suitable steering wheel
stabilizer to hold the front wheels in the straight position)
with the rear wheels raised and the front wheels on the
ground.
CAUTION!
Towing faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than
30 miles (48 km) with rear wheels on the ground can
cause severe transmission damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Four-Wheel Drive Models
The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the
vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle raised and
the opposite end on a towing dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transfer
case is operable, vehicles with a two-speed transfer case
may be towed (in the forward direction, with ALL wheels
on the ground), IF the transfer case is in NEUTRAL (N)
and the transmission is in PARK. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for detailed instructions.
Vehicles equipped with a single-speed transfer case have
no NEUTRAL position, and therefore must be towed
with all four wheels OFF the ground.
6
590 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used. Internal
damage to the transmission or transfer case will
occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
towing.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or
transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
! ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . .593
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
! ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L . . . . . . . . . .594
▫ Accessory Drive Belt Inspection . . . . . . . . . . .605
! ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II) . . .595
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607
! EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .608
! REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
! DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
! MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .598
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .614
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630
7
592 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Front/Rear Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .632
▫ Halogen Headlamps — If Equipped . . . . . . . .655
▫ Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633
▫ Front Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .634
▫ Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .656
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636
▫ Rear Tail, Stop, and Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . .657
! FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .642
▫ Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643
! VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651
! REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652
! BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .654
▫ High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .654
▫ Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp . . . . . . . . . .658
▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) . .660
▫ Rear License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .660
! FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .661
! FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE
PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .662
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .662
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 593
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
7
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
Engine Oil Dipstick
Engine Oil Fill
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
6
7
8
9
— Air Cleaner Filter
— Washer Fluid Reservoir
— Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator)
— Engine Coolant Reservoir
594 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L
1
2
3
4
— Power Distribution Center
— Engine Oil Fill
— Brake Fluid Reservoir
— Air Cleaner Filter
5
6
7
8
—
—
—
—
Washer Fluid Reservoir
Engine Oil Dipstick
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator)
Engine Coolant Reservoir
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 595
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing, while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
7
596 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on when 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is
position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light
ready for testing.
(MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
happen:
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if
not proceed to the I/M station.
your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
following:
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
position or start the engine. This means that your
not crank or start the engine.
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed
to the I/M station.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 597
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal attempting any procedure yourself.
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine penalties being assessed against you.
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR® parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
7
598 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, power steering or air conditioning.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of
component malfunction, use only the specified
fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s engine, the
engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check
the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 599
The best time to check the engine oil level is about five Change Engine Oil
minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off.
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informamaintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the tion.
dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inthe bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the tervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve
top of the safe zone on these engines.
months, whichever occurs first.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
your engine.
7
600 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
This symbol means that the oil has recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
been certified by the American the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
Petroleum Institute (API). The
Engine Oil Viscosity — 3.6L Engine
manufacturer only recommends
MOPAR® SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to Chrysler
API Certified engine oils.
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil®, Shell
Helix® or equivalent is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compartment” illustration in this section.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 601
NOTE: MOPAR® SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil®,
Shell Helix® or equivalent may be used when SAE 5W-20
engine oil meeting MS-6395 is not available.
Engine Oil Viscosity — 5.7L Engine
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use
SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper
operation of the Fuel Saver Technology. Refer to “Fuel
Saver Technology – If Equipped” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
MOPAR® SAE 5W-20 engine oil or equivalent such as
Pennzoil® or Shell Helix® is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy.
Lubricants that do not have both, the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine
oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil
filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Synthetic Engine Oils
7
602 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Materials Added To Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter Selection
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the maintenance intervals.
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
WARNING!
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
your area.
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
Engine Oil Filter
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
at every engine oil change.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 603
WARNING! (Continued)
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Release the spring clips from the air cleaner cover.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies
considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to
assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air cleaner
filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
Gasoline Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement
7
Air Cleaner Filter Cover
Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and or debris, if 1 — Clean Air Hose Clamp
you find evidence of either dirt or debris you should 2 — Air Hose
3 — Spring Clips
change your air cleaner filter.
604 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Lift the air cleaner cover to access the air cleaner filter. 3. Remove the air cleaner filter element from the housing
assembly.
Open Air Cleaner Filter Assembly
Air Cleaner Filter
1 — Air Cleaner Cover
1 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Air Cleaner Filter Inspection Surface
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 605
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE: Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is
present before replacing the air filter element.
1. Install the air cleaner filter element into the housing
assembly with the air cleaner filter inspection surface
facing downward.
2. Install the air cleaner cover onto the housing assembly
locating tabs.
3. Latch the spring clips and lock the air cleaner cover to
the housing assembly.
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt
with vehicle running.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time regardless of
ignition switch position. You could be injured by
the moving fan blades.
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks that
run across ribbed surface of belt from rib to rib, are
considered normal. These are not a reason to replace belt.
However, cracks running along a rib (not across) are not
normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be
replaced. Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive
wear, frayed cords or severe glazing.
7
606 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Belt slips
• “Groove jumping# (belt does not maintain correct
position on pulley)
• Belt broken (note: identify and correct problem before
new belt is installed)
• Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is
heard or felt while drive belt is in operation)
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component
such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully
inspected for damage and proper alignment.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Belt replacement on some models requires the use of
special tools, we recommend having your vehicle ser• Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from belt viced at an authorized dealer.
body)
Conditions that would require replacement:
• Rib or belt wear
• Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 607
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
7
608 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the
start of each warm season. This service should include
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 609
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a — If
Equipped
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf —
If Equipped
HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product
with a low GWP (Global Warming Potential). However,
the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service
facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How- PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
7
610 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Conditioning Filter Replacement (A/C Air
Filter)
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
• Do not remove the A/C air filter while the ignition
is in the ON/RUN position or personal injury may
result.
• Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is
operating or personal injury may result.
Glove Compartment
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
the glove compartment. Perform the following procedure
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stops
to replace the filter:
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents. 3 — Glove Compartment Door
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 611
2. There are glove compartment travel stops on both
sides of the glove compartment door, partially close
the glove compartment door and push inward to
release the glove compartment travel stop on one side
and repeat this procedure for the opposite side.
3. Pull the right hand side of the glove compartment
door toward the rear of the vehicle to disengage the
glove compartment door from its hinges.
NOTE: When disengaging the glove compartment door
from its hinges, there will be some resistance.
4. With the glove compartment door loose, remove the
Right Side Of Glove Compartment
glove compartment tension tether and tether clip by
sliding the clip toward the face of the glove compartment door and lifting the clip out of glove compart- 1 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
2 — Glove Compartment Door
ment door.
7
612 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Remove the filter cover by disengaging the retaining
tab and mid way snap that secures the filter cover to
the HVAC housing. Disengage the mid way snap by
pulling the door outward. Unhinge the filter cover on
the right side to fully remove the cover.
A/C Air Filter Cover
1 — Retaining Tab
2 — Mid Way Snap
3 — Filter Cover Hinge
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 613
6. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of 9. Push the door to the near closed position to reengage
the housing.
the glove compartment travel stops.
7. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on the filter NOTE: Ensure the glove compartment door hinges and
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter glove compartment travel stops are fully engaged.
cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the
Body Lubrication
cover.
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
CAUTION!
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure such as MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy
to properly install the filter will result in the need to operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
replace it more often.
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
8. Reinstall the glove compartment door on the glove
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
compartment door hinge and reattach the glove comParticular attention should also be given to hood latching
partment tension tether by inserting the tether clip in
components to ensure proper function. When performing
the glove compartment and sliding the clip away from
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechathe face of the glove compartment door.
nism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
7
614 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR®
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
periodically, not just when wiper performance problems
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulaare experienced. This inspection should include the foltions of salt or road film.
lowing points:
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use • Wear Or Uneven Edges
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt • Foreign Material
from a dry windshield.
• Hardening Or Cracking
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with • Deformation Or Fatigue
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the
affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not
attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 615
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against
the glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass
may be damaged.
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the
glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.
7
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position
1 — Wiper
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
616 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm, flip
up the release tab on the wiper blade and while
holding the wiper arm with one hand, slide the wiper
blade down towards the base of the wiper arm.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 617
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper
blade from the wiper arm by holding the wiper arm
with one hand and separating the wiper blade from
the wiper arm with the other hand (move the wiper
blade toward the right side of the vehicle to separate
the wiper blade from the wiper arm).
7
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Release Tab
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
618 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing The Front Wipers
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper arm 1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the glass
to allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the
is in the full up position.
glass.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the tip of the
wiper arm with the wiper release tab open and the NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the
blade side of the wiper facing up and away from the glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped first.
Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm without
windshield.
unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may damage the
3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through the
vehicle.
opening in the wiper blade under the release tab.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper
arm and rotate the wiper blade until it is flush against
the wiper arm. Fold down the latch release tab and
snap it into its locked position. Latch engagement will
be accompanied by an audible click.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 619
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
7
Wiper Pivot Cap In Unlocked Position
Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Wiper Blade
620 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm, grasp
the bottom end of the wiper blade nearest to wiper
arm with your right hand. With your left hand hold
the wiper arm as you pull the wiper blade away from
the wiper arm past its stop far enough to unsnap the
wiper blade pivot pin from the receptacle on the end
of the wiper arm.
NOTE: Resistance will be accompanied by an audible
snap.
4. Still grasping the bottom end of the wiper blade, move
the wiper blade upward and away from the wiper arm
to disengage.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Blade Pivot Pin
3 — Wiper Arm
4 — Wiper Arm Receptacle
5. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto the glass.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 621
Installing The Rear Wiper
Adding Washer Fluid
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the glass This vehicle is equipped with a Driver Information
to allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the Display (DID), the DID will indicate when the washer
fluid level is low. When the sensor detects a low fluid
glass.
level, the windshield will light on the vehicle graphic
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the outline and the “WASHER FLUID LOW” message will be
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped first. displayed.
Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm without
unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may damage the The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear
window washer is shared. The fluid reservoir is located in
vehicle.
the engine compartment, be sure to check the fluid level at
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer
3. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the opening on solvent only (not radiator antifreeze). When refilling the
the end of the wiper arm. Grab the bottom end of the washer fluid reservoir, take some washer fluid and apply it
wiper arm with one hand, and press the wiper blade to a cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper blades, this
will help blade performance. To prevent freeze-up of your
flush with the wiper arm until it snaps into place.
windshield washer system in cold weather, select a solu4. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass and snap the tion or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature
wiper arm pivot cap back into place.
7
622 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
range of your climate. This rating information can be found have an authorized technician inspect the complete exon most washer fluid containers.
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
WARNING!
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
Commercially available windshield washer solvents exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
WARNING!
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 623
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
(Continued)
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
7
624 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control sys- Cooling System
tems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
Engine Coolant Checks
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
motion.
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the
vehicle.
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 625
for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
down the face of the condenser.
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber, to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at needed to be added to the system please contact your
the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the local authorized dealer.
entire system for leaks.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to
MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
7
626 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
(Continued)
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 627
you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conform- • Use only high purity water such as distilled or deioning to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
engine cooling system.
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze): Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing ac• We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
the vehicle is operated.
Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler
Material Standard MS.90032.
NOTE:
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant • Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stanproperly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
dard MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concenlead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
trations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
needed to be added to the system please contact your
−34° F (−37° C) are anticipated.
local authorized dealer.
7
628 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recommended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
WARNING!
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool
an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding
or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 629
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
spills immediately.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS.90032
should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Coolant Level
Points To Remember
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporThe radiator normally remains completely full, so there is ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once • Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
a month.
7
630 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antioperation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
expansion bottle must also be protected against freezresult in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
ing.
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested Brake System
for leaks.
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a system components should be inspected periodically.
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion maintenance intervals.
protection of your engine which contains aluminum
components.
WARNING!
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 631
WARNING! (Continued)
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under the hood service, or immediately if the brake system warning lamp indicates system
failure.
The brake master cylinder has a plastic reservoir. On the
outboard side of the reservoir, there is a “MAX” dot and
a “MIN” dot. The fluid level must be kept within these
two dots. Do not add fluid above the MAX mark, because
leakage may occur at the cap.
With disc brakes, the fluid level can be expected to fall as
the brake linings wear. However, an unexpected drop in
fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check
should be conducted.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
(Continued)
7
632 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
(Continued)
Front/Rear Axle Fluid
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be
inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the
fluid level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Front Axle Fluid Level Check
The front axle oil level needs to be no lower than 1/8 in
(3 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 633
The front axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to Selection Of Lubricant
22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m).
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “MaintainCAUTION!
ing Your Vehicle” for further information.
Do not overtighten the plugs as it could damage them
and cause them to leak.
Transfer Case
Fluid Level Check
Rear Axle Fluid Level Check
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
The rear axle oil level needs to be no lower than 1/8 in (3 required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
the exterior surfaces of the transfer case assembly should
mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.
be inspected. If oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid
The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to
level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m).
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the plugs as it could damage them
and cause them to leak.
Adding Fluid
Add fluid at the filler hole, until it runs out of the hole,
when the vehicle is in a level position.
7
634 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this
First remove fill plug, then remove drain plug. Recomsection for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain
mended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs is 15 to
the transmission fluid at the correct level using the
25 ft lbs (20 to 34 N·m).
recommended fluid.
Drain
CAUTION!
When installing plugs, do not overtighten. You could
damage them and cause them to leak.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant should be
used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 635
Special Additives
Fluid Level Check
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require
any special additives in the transmission.
adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine
fluid level checks are not required, therefore the transmisAutomatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
sion has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can check your
product and its performance may be impaired by suppletransmission fluid level using special service tools.
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction,
policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the
leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle
with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmisadversely affect seals.
sion damage.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
7
636 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
underbody protection.
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the
life of the vehicle.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. Howresistance built into your vehicle.
ever, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is What Causes Corrosion?
disassembled for any reason.
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
The most common causes are:
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed
on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are
highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated,
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 637
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
Special Care
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR® • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
a month.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
7
638 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar • To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner.
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
the owner.
abrasives or polishing compounds. They will perma• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, nently damage this finish and such damage is not covde-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well ered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY
packaged and sealed.
MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider on a regular basis this is all that is required to maintain
this finish.
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 639
CAUTION! (Continued)
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Only MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Interior Care
Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following mancarpeting.
ner:
Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
MOPAR® Total Clean is specifically recommended for
with a clean, dry towel.
leather upholstery.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean, or a
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
7
640 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
and MOPAR® Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 641
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or windows
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR® Total Clean, a
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove
directly on the mirror.
the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft
cloth.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care buckles do not work properly.
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
(Continued)
7
642 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure
to use proper fuses may result in serious personal
injury, fire and/or property damage.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 643
Power Distribution Center
The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine
compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses, micro fuses, relays, and circuit breakers. A
description of each fuse and component may be stamped
on the inside cover, otherwise the cavity number of each
fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to
the following chart.
7
Power Distribution Center
Cavity
F03
F05
Cartridge Fuse
60 Amp Yellow
40 Amp Green
Micro Fuse
–
–
Description
Radiator Fan
Compressor for Air Suspension - If
Equipped
644 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F06
Cartridge Fuse
40 Amp Green
Micro Fuse
–
F07
F08
F09
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F17
F19
F20
F22
F23
40 Amp Green
20 Amp Blue
30 Amp Pink
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink
40 Amp Green
40 Amp Green
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue
30 Amp Pink
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Description
Anti-lock Brakes/Electronic Stability Control Pump
Starter Solenoid
Emission Sensors (Diesel engine only)
Diesel Fuel Heater (Diesel engine only)
Body Controller / Exterior Lighting #2
Trailer Tow Electric Brake - If Equipped
Body Controller #3 / Power Locks
Blower Motor Front
Body Controller #4 / Interior Lights #2
Headlamp Washer- If Equipped
Headrest Solenoid- If Equipped
Passenger Door Module
Engine Control Module
Interior Lights #1
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 645
Cavity
F24
F25
F26
Cartridge Fuse
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
Micro Fuse
–
–
–
F28
F29
F30
F32
F34
F35
F36
F37
F38
F39
20 Amp Blue
20 Amp Blue
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
25 Amp Clear
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Description
Driver Door Module
Front Wipers
Anti-lock Brakes/Stability Control
Module/Valves
Trailer Tow Backup Lights - If Equipped
Trailer Tow Parking Lights - If Equipped
Trailer Tow Receptacle - If Equipped
Drive Train Control Module
Slip Differential Control
Sunroof - If Equipped
Rear Defroster
Rear Blower Motor - If Equipped
Power Inverter 115V AC - If Equipped
Power Liftgate - If Equipped
7
646 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F40
Cartridge Fuse
–
Micro Fuse
10 Amp Red
F42
F44
F46
F49
F50
–
–
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
F51
–
15 Amp Blue
F52
F53
–
–
5 Amp Tan
20 Amp Yellow
F55
F56
–
–
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
Description
Daytime Running Lights/Headlamp
Leveling
Horn
Diagnostic Port
Tire Pressure Monitor - If Equipped
Integrated Central Stack / Climate Control
Air Suspension Control Module - If
Equipped
Ignition Node Module / Keyless Ignition
/ Steering Column Lock
Battery Sensor
Trailer Tow – Left Turn/Stop Lights - If
Equipped
DTV / DSRC
Additional Content (Diesel engine only)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 647
Cavity
F57
F59
F60
F61
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
–
Micro Fuse
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
F62
F63
F64
F66
–
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
25 Amp Clear
10 Amp Red
F67
–
15 Amp Blue
F68
F69
F70
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
15 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow
Description
HID Headlamps LH - If Equipped
Purging Pump (Diesel engine only)
Transmission Control Module
Transmission Control Module/PM Sensor
(Diesel engine only)
Air Conditioning Clutch
Ignition Coils (Gas), Urea Heater (Diesel)
Fuel Injectors / Powertrain
Sunroof / Passenger Window Switches /
Rain Sensor
CD / DVD / Bluetooth Hands-free Module - If Equipped
Rear Wiper Motor
Spotlight Feed - If Equipped
Fuel Pump Motor
7
648 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F71
F73
F74
F76
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
–
Micro Fuse
30 Amp Green
15 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
F77
–
10 Amp Red
F78
–
10 Amp Red
F80
–
10 Amp Red
F81
F82
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
F83
–
10 Amp Red
Description
Audio Amplifier
HID Headlamp RH - If Equipped
Brake Vacuum Pump - If Equipped
Anti-lock Brakes/Electronic Stability
Control
Drivetrain Control Module/Front Axle
Disconnect Module
Engine Control Module / Electric Power
Steering - If Equipped
Universal Garage Door Opener / Compass
/ Anti-Intrusion Module
Trailer Tow Right Turn/Stop Lights
Steering Column Control Module/ Cruise
Control
Fuel Door
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 649
Cavity
F84
F85
F86
F87
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
–
Micro Fuse
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
F88
F90/F91
F92
F93
F94
F95
F96
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
F97
–
20 Amp Yellow
Description
Switch Bank/Instrument Cluster
Airbag Module
Airbag Module
Air Suspension – If Equipped / Trailer
Tow / Steering Column Control Module
Instrument Panel Cluster
Power Outlet (Rear seats) Selectable
Rear Console Lamp - If Equipped
Cigar Lighter
Shifter / Transfer Case Module
Rear Camera / ParkSense®
Rear Seat Heater Switch / Flashlamp
Charger - If Equipped
Rear Heated Seats & Heated Steering
Wheel - If Equipped
7
650 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F98
F99
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
Micro Fuse
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
F100
F101
–
–
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
F103
–
10 Amp Red
F104
–
20 Amp Yellow
Description
Front Heated Seats - If Equipped
Climate Control / Driver Assistance Systems Module
Active Damping - If Equipped
Electrochromatic Mirror/Smart High
Beams - If Equipped
Cabin Heater (Diesel Engine Only)/Rear
HVAC
Power Outlets (Instrument Panel/Center
Console)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 651
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the power distribution
center and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
days you may want to take steps to protect your battery.
You may:
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
7
652 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Bulbs
Glove Box Lamp
Grab Handle Lamp
Overhead Console Reading Lamps
Rear Cargo Lamp
Visor Vanity Lamp
Underpanel Courtesy Lamps
Instrument Cluster (General Illumination)
Telltale/Hazard Lamp
Bulb Number
194
L002825W5W
VT4976
214–2
V26377
906
103
74
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 653
Exterior Bulbs
Headlamps (Low Beam) - If Equipped
Premium Headlamps (Low/High Beam)
Headlamps (High Beam) - If Equipped
Premium Park/Turn Signal Lamp
Premium Daytime Running Lamp (DRL)
Front Fog Lamps
Front Side Marker - If Equipped
Premium Front Side Marker - If Equipped
Front Park/Turn Lamp - If Equipped
Rear Body Side Turn Signal Lamps
Auxiliary Liftgate Tail Lamps
Liftgate Backup Lamps
Rear License Lamps
Rear Body Side Stop Lamps
Bulb Number
H11
D3S (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
9005
LED - (Service at Authorized Dealer)
LED - (Service at Authorized Dealer)
H11
W5W
LED - (Service at Authorized Dealer)
7444NA (WY27/8W)
7440NA (WY21W)
LED - (Service at Authorized Dealer)
921 (W16W)
LED - (Service at Authorized Dealer)
3157KRD LCP
7
654 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Body Side Tail Lamps
CHMSL - Center High Mounted Stop Lamp
Bulb Number
LED - (Service at Authorized Dealer)
LED - (Service at Authorized Dealer)
NOTE:
Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your authorized dealer.
If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual.
BULB REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
accelerate the clearing process.
High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) — If
Equipped
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of
this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to
an authorized dealer for service.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 655
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps when the
headlamp switch is turned ON. It may cause serious
electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized dealer for service.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the
bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps, when the headlamps are
Front Turn Signal
turned on, there is a blue hue to the lamps. This diminishes and becomes more white after approximately 10 1. Open the hood.
seconds, as the system charges.
2. Turn the turn signal bulb one–quarter turn counterHalogen Headlamps — If Equipped
clockwise to remove from housing.
1. Open the hood.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the
bulb.
2. Turn the low or high beam bulb one–quarter turn
counterclockwise to remove from housing.
7
656 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
• Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If
the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface,
clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
• Always use the correct bulb size and type for
replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may
overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket
or the lamp wiring.
Front Fog Lamps
1. Reach through the cutout in the splash shield and
disconnect the wiring harness from the fog lamp
connector.
2. Firmly grasp the bulb by the two latches and squeeze
them together to unlock the bulb from the back of the
front fog lamp housing.
3. Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed opening in
the housing.
4. Align the index tabs of the front fog lamp bulb with
the slots in the collar of the bulb opening on the back
of the front fog lamp housing.
5. Insert the bulb into the housing until the index tabs are
engaged in the slots of the collar.
6. Firmly and evenly push the bulb straight into the lamp
housing until both tabs snap firmly into place and are
fully engaged.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 657
7. Connect the wiring harness to the front fog lamp
connector.
Rear Tail, Stop, and Turn Signal Lamps
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Remove the two push-pins from the tail lamp housing.
3. Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly rearward to
disengage the lamp from the aperture panel.
7
Tail Lamp Push Pins
4. Twist socket counter clockwise and remove from
lamp.
658 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Use a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver to pry the
lower trim from the liftgate.
3. Continue removing the trim.
4. Disconnect the two trim panel lights.
1 — Rear Stop Lamp Bulb Socket
2 — LED Tail Connector – Do Not Remove
3 — Rear Turn Signal Bulb Socket
5. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
6. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and reattach the
lamp assembly.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 659
7
Rear Liftgate Tail Lamps
1 — Auxiliary LED Tail Connector – Do Not Remove
5. Tail lamps are now visible. Rotate socket(s) counter 2 — Backup Bulb Socket
clockwise.
6. Remove/replace bulb(s).
7. Reinstall the socket(s)
8. Reverse process to reinstall the liftgate trim.
660 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
Rear License Lamp
The center high mounted stop lamp is LED. Service at 1. The rear license lamps are LED. Service at Authorized
Authorized Dealer.
Dealer
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 661
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S.
Fuel (Approximate)
3.6L and 5.7L Engines
25 Gallons
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
6 Quarts
5.7L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
7 Quarts
Cooling System*
3.6L Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000
10.4 Quarts
Mile Formula or equivalent)
5.7 Liter Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/
15.4 Quarts
150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) – Without Trailer Tow Package
5.7 Liter Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/
16 Quarts
150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) – With Trailer Tow Package
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
Metric
94 Liters
5.6 Liters
6.6 Liters
9.9 Liters
14.6 Liters
15.2 Liters
7
662 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology).
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20
Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR®, Pennzoil®,
and Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20
Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR®, Pennzoil®,
and Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 663
Component
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs –
Spark Plugs –
Fuel Selection
Fuel Selection
3.6L Engine
5.7L Engine
– 3.6L Engine
– 5.7L Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR® Engine Oil Filter or
equivalent.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs.
87 Octane
87 Octane Acceptable - 89 Octane Recommended
7
664 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 665
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Transfer Case – Single-Speed (Quadra-Trac I®)
Transfer Case – Two-Speed (Quadra-Trac II®)
Axle Differential (Front)
Axle Differential (Rear) – With Electronic Limited-Slip
Differential (ELSD)
Axle Differential (Rear) – Without Electronic LimitedSlip Differential (ELSD)
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Use only Mopar® ZF 8&9 Speed ATF™ Automatic
Transmission Fluid or equivalent. Failure to use the
correct fluid may affect the function or performance of
your transmission.
We recommend you use Automatic Transmission Fluid
3353.
We recommend you use MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
We recommend you use MOPAR® GL-5 Synthetic Axle
Lubricant SAE 75W-85.
We recommend you use MOPAR® GL-5 Synthetic Axle
Lubricant SAE 75W-85 with friction modifier additive.
We recommend you use MOPAR® GL-5 Synthetic Axle
Lubricant SAE 75W-85.
7
666 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Component
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir – 3.6L Engine
Power Steering Reservoir – 5.7L Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3 Brake Fluid,
SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Hydraulic Fluid.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Power Steering Fluid
+4 or MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
! MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .668
▫ Maintenance Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .670
8
668 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change interYour vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months,
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will whichever comes first.
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for Severe Duty All Models
scheduled maintenance.
• Change Engine Oil at 4000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
is operated in a dusty and off road environment. This
indicator message will illuminate. This means that sertype of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or
cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will • Check engine oil level
influence when the “Oil Change Required” message is
• Check windshield washer fluid level
displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the
change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles • Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual
(5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as
wear or damage
soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
master cylinder and power steering, and fill as needed.
message after completing the scheduled oil change.
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 669
Required Maintenance
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for required maintenance.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter.
Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system
turns on.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions.
8
670 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect front suspension, tie rod
ends, and replace if necessary.
Inspect the front and rear axle
fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, offroad or frequent trailer towing.
Inspect the brake linings, parking
brake function.
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
32,000
Maintenance Chart
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect transfer case fluid.
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Replace spark plugs.**
Flush and replace the engine
coolant at 10 years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) whichever
comes first.
Change transfer case fluid.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necessary.
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
32,000
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 671
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
8
X
X
X
X
X
X
672 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
! SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .675
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .677
▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .675
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .677
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .675 ! WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .678
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .675 ! MOPAR® PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678
! IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .675 ! REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .678
▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . .676
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . .676
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .676
▫ In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .679
! PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .679
9
674 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
! DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .681
▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .681
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .681
▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .682
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 675
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
Prepare For The Appointment
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have the for an appointment.
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work
to be performed may not be covered by the warranty. IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
a maintenance log of your vehicle’s service history. This interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
can often provide a clue to the current problem.
with our products and services.
Prepare A List
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
Be Reasonable With Requests
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
If you list a number of items and you must have your correctly and in a timely manner.
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
9
676 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
This is why you should always talk to an authorized FCA US LLC Customer Center
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- P.O. Box 21–8004
solved with this process.
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer. Phone: (877) 426-5337
They want to know if you need assistance.
Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con- P.O. Box 1621
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
center.
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen- Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
ter should include the following information:
In Mexico Contact
• Owner’s name and address
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 677
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Service Contract
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle contract documents, and contact the person listed in
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected those documents.
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
9
678 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects,
or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC
warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR® PARTS
MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 679
defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424- 9153),
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590.
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
You can also obtain other information about motor NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
Service Manuals
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the inforshould contact the Customer Service Department imme- mation that students and professional technicians need in
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
9
680 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, Owner’s Manuals
and/or components is written in straightforward lanThese Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
guage with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance proceDiagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, dures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix Call toll free at:
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and • 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshoot- • 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests Or
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 681
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The Traction Grades
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
your vehicle.
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perforrequirements in addition to these grades.
mance.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
9
682 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX
10
684 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . .190
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .626
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Advance Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Air Bag Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Air Bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Driver Knee Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Side Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Air Bag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Air Bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Air Bag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .602
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .608
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .608
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
Air Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
Alarm
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Tamper Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
INDEX 685
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .628
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636
Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Automatic High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .377
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636
Fluid And Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .634
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .634
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . .262
Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .26
Belts, Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652
10
686 INDEX
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241 Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .595
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .661 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Caps, Filler
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463 Child Restraints
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .628
Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt . . . . . . . .99
Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
Infants And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint . . . .98
Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle
Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637
LATCH Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . .90
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .660
Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . .86
Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
INDEX 687
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .677
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .628
Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .626
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .661
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629
Disposal Of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .628
Drain, Flush, And Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624
Points To Remember . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze)
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise Control (Speed Control). . . .
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.629
.628
.628
.625
.636
.190
.268
.675
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .586
10
688 INDEX
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .628
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Child-Protection Door Lock — Rear Doors . . . . . .34
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Door Opener, Garage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
Driver Information Display
DID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
Instrument Cluster Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Off-Pavement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System™) . . . . . .353
E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Economy (Fuel) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) .
Electric Rear Window Defrost. . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.527
.423
.262
.280
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . .
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . .
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) .
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . .
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . .
Engine
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . .
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.132
.467
.470
.470
.186
.471
.288
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.580
.562
.576
.582
.595
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.602
.420
.108
.593
.593
INDEX 689
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .662
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Exhaust System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . .
Air Conditioning . .
Engine Oil . . . . . . .
Engine Oil Disposal
Flashers . . . . . . . . . . .
Hazard Warning . . .
Turn Signal . . . . . . .
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range . . . .
Engine Oil . . . . . . .
Fuel Requirements .
Maintenance . . . . . .
Replacement Parts . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.602
.388
.602
.602
.562
.562
.113
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.529
.528
.527
.530
.529
10
690 INDEX
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . .
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts .
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Forward Collision Warning . . . . . . . .
Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . . .
Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.529
.418
.665
.661
.113
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.635
.631
.598
.463
.662
.288
.656
.157
.217
.562
.434
.434
.434
Four Wheel Drive Operation
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . .
Front Axle (Differential). . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . .
Economy Mode . . . . . . .
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Materials Added . . . . . . .
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . .
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . .
Requirements . . . . . . . . .
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . .
Fuel, Flexible . . . . . . . . . . .
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.434
.580
.632
.522
.530
.525
.523
.423
.524
.522
.288
.525
.524
.522
.522
.661
.527
.530
INDEX 691
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .642
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®)
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . .
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Information . . . . . . . . . . .
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . .
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. . . . . .
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.246
.523
.522
.523
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . .
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . .
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . .
Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . .
Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener)
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.288
.288
.288
.288
.426
.213
.640
.537
.536
.534 Ignition
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.654
.655
.640
.168
.176
.655
.133
.420
.288
.478
.475
. . . . . . . . . . . .540
. . . . . . . . . . . .246
. . . . . . . . . . . .165
10
. . . . . . . . . . . . .13
. . . . . . . . . . . . .22
692 INDEX
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Instrument Panel And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .178
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Inverter, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
iPod® Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
iPod®/USB/MP3 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
Jacking Instructions .
Jack Location . . . . .
Jack Operation . . . .
Jump Starting . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.568
.565
.568
.576
Key Fob
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . .19
Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . . .19
Unlock Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Unlock Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Keyless Go. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
INDEX 693
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
Light Bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .657
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .654
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .660
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .654
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .288
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .657
Rear Tail Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .657
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .654
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . .288
10
694 INDEX
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .657
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine).
.
.
.
.
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .679
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Memory Seats And Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
. . . . .607 MOPAR® Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
. . . . .598 MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
. . . . .668 Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
. . . . .288
INDEX 695
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Off-Pavement Driving (Off-Road) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .661
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .599
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600
Materials Added To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . .246
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Overhead Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Paddle Shifters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
ParkSense® System, Rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
10
696 INDEX
Placard, Tire And Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .495
Power
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
Lift Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .262
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . .183
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Preparation For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless Entry) . .22
Quadra-Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
Quadra-Trac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap)
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . .
Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . .
Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . .
Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Wiper/Washer. . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.502
.628
.375
.373
.352
.181
.632
.241
.140
.268
.221
.157
.279
.279
INDEX 697
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . .555
Shifting Out Of Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . .440
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . .19
Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . . .19
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .373
Remote Starting
Uconnect® Customer Programmable Features . . .325
Uconnect® Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Retractable Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
Roll Over Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle. .
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . .
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . .
Safety Information, Tire . . . . .
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.110
.113
.678
.109
.487
.109
.668
10
698 INDEX
Seat Belt
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . .58
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . . . . . . . . . .60
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode . . . . . . .62
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Engage The Automatic Locking Mode . . . . . . . . .62
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . .58
Tamper Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 Security System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
INDEX 699
Selec-Terrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .662
SENTRY KEY®
FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .675
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .677
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .679
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Signals, Turn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
Snow Plow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Spare Tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .662
Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
Engine Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Starting And Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
Steering
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .373
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
Storage, Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387
10
700 INDEX
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag . . . . . . . . .68
Suspension, Air. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
Sway Control, Trailer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . .
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) .
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . .
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . .
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire And Loading Information Placard .
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.288
.182
.385
.288
.277
.182
.494
.487
.113
Aging (Life Of Tires) . . . . . . . . .
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Information . . . . . . . . .
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . .
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . .
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.509
.499
.512
.506
.499
.502
.500
.509
.494
.514
.288
.681
.502
.510
.513
.487
.488
.504
.566
INDEX 701
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . .
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . .
Tow Hooks, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome .
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . .
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . .
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . .
Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.508
.546
.508
.487
.543
.582
.536
.586
.541
.552
.541
.552
.469
.474
.536
.550
.540
.544
.543
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
Trailer Towing Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .634
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .26
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®). . . .246
Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .22
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .22
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
10
702 INDEX
Uconnect®
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . .325
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
Screen Activated Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Uconnect® Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Uconnect® Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Uconnect® Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Uconnect® Voice Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .681
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
Warning, Roll Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637
Wheel And Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638
Wind Buffeting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496 Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
INDEX 703
Windshield Washers . . . .
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield Wiper Blades .
Windshield Wipers . . . . .
Wiper Blade Replacement
Wipers, Intermittent . . . .
Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.176
.621
.614
.176
.614
.178
.181
10
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
2015 Grand Cherokee
OWNER’S MANUAL
Chrysler Group LLC
15WK741-126-AD
2015
Fourth Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Grand Cherokee
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement